Fifth Edition Rev 2
Printed in the U.S.A.
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
18DS-126-AE
OWNER’S MANUAL
2018
1500/2500/3500
RAM TRUCK
RAM TRUCK 1500/2500/3500
2018
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................7
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................13
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................167
5
SAFETY ........................................................................207
6
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................291
7
INCASEOFEMERGENCY ...........................................................457
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .....................................................527
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................603
10
MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................621
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................689
12
INDEX..........................................................................675
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION .........................4
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...............5
▫ Essential Information ......................5
▫ Symbols ...............................5
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................5
䡵 VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS ..............6
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .....6
1
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that are not intended for conventional pas-
senger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so
take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If
equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was
designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for
off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for
a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this
vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar
with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for brak-
ing, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting.
Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces.
Your driving skills will improve with experience. When
driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the
vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws
of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and
local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of
this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips”
in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer
oriented documents. In the attached Warranty Booklet you
will find a description of the services that FCA offers to its
customers, the Warranty Certificate and the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please
take the time to read all of these publications carefully
before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warn-
ings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable
operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Own-
er’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced.
4 INTRODUCTION
For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the
model described for technical and/or commercial reasons.
For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
If applicable, refer to the Owner’s Manual Supplement for
related information.
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose sym-
bols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. U.S.
residents refer to the Warranty Information book, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Cov-
ered” section of the Warranty Information book. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves,
refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on
these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed
by the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be
supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are miss-
ing, please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in
obtaining replacement documents from the applicable
manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimen-
sional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is
intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical sup-
port. For service issues, contact your authorized dealer.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
6 INTRODUCTION
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment 4 — Wheels/Tires
2 — Windshield 5 — Doors
3 — Headlights 6 — Exterior Mirrors
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights 2 — Tailgate Handle
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents 4 — Instrument Cluster
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 5 — Gear Selector
3 — Steering Wheel 6 — Radio
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior
1 — Door Locks/Window Switches 4 — Radio Controls
2 — Seats 5 — Storage Compartment
3 — Gear Selector
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS .................................18
▫ Key Fobs .............................18
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .......................26
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped....26
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped ....27
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder .................28
䡵 REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .............28
▫ How To Use Remote Start..................28
▫ Remote Start Abort Message ...............28
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode ................29
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle ...........................29
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle ............................29
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .30
▫ General Information .....................30
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................30
▫ Customer Key Programming ...............31
▫ Replacement Keys .......................31
▫ General Information .....................32
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ...............32
▫ To Arm The System ......................32
▫ To Disarm The System ....................33
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................34
▫ Security System Manual Override ............34
䡵 DOORS ...............................34
▫ Manual Door Locks ......................34
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ...........36
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .........36
3
▫ Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ........40
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock ................40
䡵 SEATS ................................42
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustment ..............42
▫ Manual Rear Seat Adjustment ...............44
▫ Power Driver Seat Adjustment — If Equipped . . .45
▫ Power Passenger Seat Adjustment —
If Equipped ...........................47
▫ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ..........48
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ...............51
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ..............53
▫ Manual Folding Rear Seats
(Mega Cab Models) ......................54
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Regular Cab Models) ....................57
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................57
▫ Front Head Restraint Adjustment ............58
▫ Rear Head Restraint Adjustment .............58
▫ Front Head Restraint Removal ..............59
▫ Rear Head Restraint Removal ...............59
䡵 STEERING WHEEL .......................60
▫ Tilt Steering Column .....................60
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped.........61
䡵 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED ...........................61
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................63
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......63
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....63
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped .............64
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................65
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped............................65
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..............66
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard
And Trailer Tow — If Equipped .............67
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ........69
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............69
▫ Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped .....70
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped ......70
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......................71
▫ Headlight Switch .......................71
▫ Headlights ............................72
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . .73
▫ Multifunction Lever .....................73
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ..................73
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped ...........................73
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................74
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .........74
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights .............75
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available
With Automatic Headlights Only) ............75
▫ Headlight Delay ........................76
▫ Lights-On Reminder......................76
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .................76
▫ Turn Signals ...........................77
▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ..........77
▫ Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped ....77
▫ Battery Saver...........................79
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS .......................79
▫ Courtesy Lights .........................79
▫ Illuminated Approach ....................81
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........82
▫ Windshield Wipers ......................82
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ..........84
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................85
▫ Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen . .85
▫ Manual Climate Controls With A Touchscreen . . .89
▫
Automatic Climate Controls With A Touchscreen. . .93
▫ Climate Control Functions.................100
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ..........................101
▫ Operating Tips ........................101
䡵 WINDOWS ............................104
▫ Power Windows — If Equipped ............104
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................107
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .........108
▫ Opening Sunroof .......................109
▫ Closing Sunroof ........................109
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................109
▫ Sunshade Operation .....................109
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ....................110
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ................110
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ....................110
▫ Ignition Off Operation ...................110
䡵 HOOD ...............................111
▫ To Open The Hood .....................111
▫ To Close The Hood ......................111
䡵 TAILGATE .............................112
▫ Opening .............................112
▫ Closing ..............................112
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED ....112
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink .....113
▫ Programming A Rolling Code ..............114
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code...........115
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .......116
▫ Using HomeLink .......................118
▫ Security..............................118
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ....................118
▫ General Information .....................119
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ..................120
▫ Storage ..............................120
▫ Cupholders ..........................131
▫ Electrical
Power Outlets ..................132
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped ..........................136
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped .............136
▫ Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ..........137
䡵 PICKUP BOX ...........................138
▫ Cargo Camera — If Equipped .............139
䡵 RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED .................140
▫ RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins......140
▫ Locking And Unlocking RamBox ............142
▫ RamBox Safety Warning ..................143
▫ Bed Extender — If Equipped...............144
▫ Bed Rail Tie-Down System ................150
䡵 SLIDE-IN CAMPERS .....................151
▫ Camper Applications ....................151
䡵 EASY-OFF TAILGATE ....................152
▫ Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or
Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped.........152
▫ Removing The Tailgate ...................153
▫ Locking Tailgate........................154
䡵 TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................154
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal ...........155
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation ..........160
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ...........166
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
KEYS
Key Fobs
Your vehicle uses either a wireless ignition node system or
keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a
key fob with a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and an ignition
switch. The keyless ignition system consists of a key fob
and Keyless Enter-N-Go button.
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the square
end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the
instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also
contains the key fob and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at
the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then
pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to
your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be
triggered. Insert the key into the ignition and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the security
system.
This Keyless Push Button Ignition key fob allows the driver
to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as
long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment. The
Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions,
three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN.
Key Fob Emergency Key
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The fourth position is START, during start RUN will
illuminate. It also contains the key fob and an emergency
key, which stores in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the backside of the key fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to
your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be
triggered. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emer-
gency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE START/
STOP button and push to disarm the security system.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the door lock cylinder with either side up.
The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors, tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped) as
well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a key fob with integrated
key. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system. Push and release the lock button on
the key fob to lock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox
(if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the horn
will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Key Fob Emergency Key
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE: Inserting the key fob with integrated key into the
ignition switch disables the system from responding to any
button pushes from that key fob. Driving at speeds 5 mph
(8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding
to all key fob buttons for all key fobs.
To Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door. Push the unlock button twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and the
RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
NOTE: The instrument cluster display or Uconnect Set-
tings are setup for driver door first, otherwise this will
unlock all doors.
WIN Key Fob With Integrated Key
Passive Entry Key Fob
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors, the tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped). The turn
signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowl-
edge the signal.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE: Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you
are in the vehicle will activate the vehicle security alarm
system. Opening a door with the vehicle security alarm
system activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the
unlock button to deactivate the vehicle security alarm
system.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push the Panic
button on the key fob. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or
greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm
is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The Vehicle)
— If Equipped
For easy entry and loading, your vehicle can be
lowered by pushing the key fob air suspension
lowering button two times. When key fob low-
ering is requested, the vehicle will send a series
of chirps and flashes to alert the customer that the opera-
tion has begun and will continue these alerts until it
successfully lowers.
The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to
lower remotely:
• The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit (Park)
ride height.
• The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
• All doors must be closed.
• The key fob must be out of the vehicle.
Canceling Remote Lowering
Vehicle lowering can be cancelled at anytime. When vehicle
lowering is canceled, the vehicle will raise up to the next
defined level and lock out the remote lowering feature
until the ignition has been cycled ON/OFF.
To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air suspension
lowering button one time during the lowering process.
When vehicle lowering is canceled, the horn will chirp two
times and the turn signal lamps will flash four times. Once
raising is completed, the horn will chirp one time.
NOTE: Refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With
Remote Control
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for fur-
ther information.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1.
Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch
on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
Emergency Key Removal
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2. Separating key fob halves requires screw removal – if
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the key
fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
Remove Screw From Key Fob Case
Separating Key Fob Case
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together, reposition and secure the screw as shown in
step #2 for removal.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE: Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another ve-
hicle.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Separating Key Fob Case
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
IGNITION SWITCH
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions
are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released
from the START position, the switch automatically returns
to the ON/RUN position.
Wireless Ignition Switch
1—OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless
Entry key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN
will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button, with your foot applied on the brake
pedal, and push to operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1—OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, a
chime will sound to remind you to remove the key fob.
NOTE:
• ⬙Keyed⬙ Ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC
when the driver door is open.
• “Keyless⬙ Ignition systems will chime in ACC or RUN
when the driver door is open.
• The instrument cluster display will display “Key In
Ignition.”
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• Fuel meets minimum requirement
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active until
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash,
vehicle doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine will
run for 15 minutes.
NOTE:
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
tion must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable with a one time push of the remote start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the vehicle security alarm system (if equipped).
Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the duration
of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is placed in the
ON/RUN mode.
NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated
and deactivated through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion on Remote Start Comfort System operation.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, an Ignition Node Module,
Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to
crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds
if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine.
NOTE: A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
During normal operation, after placing the keyless ignition
in the ON/RUN position, the vehicle security light will
turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins
to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used
an invalid key fob to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Customer Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and
ignition for unauthorized operation. When the vehicle
security alarm is activated, interior switches for door locks
are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible
signals for the first three minutes. The horn will sound, the
headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash and vehicle security light will flash repeatedly.
For an additional 15 minutes only, the headlights will turn
on, the park lamps and/or turn signals, and vehicle
security light will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting The Engine⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is
⬙OFF.⬙
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is
⬙OFF⬙ and the key is physically removed from the
ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter- N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
The vehicle security alarm will set when you use the power
door locks, or use the key fob to lock the doors. After all the
doors are locked and closed, the vehicle security light, in
the instrument panel cluster, will flash rapidly for about 16
seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the
alarm is set, the vehicle security light will flash at a slower
rate to indicate that the system is armed.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
1. Push the unlock button on the key fob.
2. Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry door
handle. If equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information.
3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, push the Keyless Ignition START/STOP but-
ton (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the
key to the ON position.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Rearming Of The System
The vehicle security alarm will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of headlights and vehicle security light
flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the condi-
tion which initiated the alarm is still present, the system
will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors
and ignition.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock
knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up.
Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock knob.
Doors locked before closing will remain locked when
closed.
The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on
your vehicle.
Door Lock Knob
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs
from vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The power door lock switches are on each front door trim
panel. Use these switches to lock or unlock the doors.
NOTE: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent
the Keyless Enter-N-Go system from starting the vehicle.
If you push the power door lock switch while the key fob
is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally
locking your key fob in the vehicle. Removing the key fob
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A chime
will sound if the key fob is in the ignition switch and a door
is open, as a reminder to remove the key fob.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
cle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
Power Door Lock Switch
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The vehicles security alarm can be armed/disarmed by
pushing the passive entry key fob lock/unlock buttons
(if equipped).
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
passive entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
passive entry handle from locking/unlocking the ve-
hicle.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all doors automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle:
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have
been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the
vehicle for any valid Passive Entry key fobs.
If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is detected
inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key
fobs are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry
System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps
the horn three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will
lock and the Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the
vehicle).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the door handle lock button to lock all doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle lock button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is
done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an autho-
rized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see
an authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Doors Unlock — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
either front door is opened. This will occur only after the
vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the
vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all doors
closed).
Automatic Doors Unlock Programming —
If Equipped
The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance
with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle have
the Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to
engage and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When
the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside with the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged (locked).
NOTE:
• After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it is
in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
door lock switch to the unlock position, roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door
handle.
Child Lock Control
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Front Seat Adjustment
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, lean
back to the desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward
and lift the lever. Release the lever once the seat back is in
the upright position
Manual Recline Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Dump Feature (Manual Recline Seat Only) —
Standard Cab
Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seat back to
swing (dump) forward on manual recliner seats. This
“dump” feature allows access to the storage bin behind the
seat.
WARNING!
• Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
actuating the handle. The seatback may swing for-
ward and hit you causing injury.
• To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatback and
actuate the handle, then position the seatback in the
desired position.
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard seat
portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat. On
some models, the back of the center portion (20%) easily
folds down to provide an armrest/center storage compart-
ment.
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle,
lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired
position, release the handle.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Power Driver Seat Adjustment — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power
driver’s seat. The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion. There are two
power seat switches that are used to control the movement
of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or
rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar
support.
Power Passenger Seat Adjustment — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way power passen-
ger seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat. The switch is used to control the movement
of the seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or
rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Lumbar Control Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver’s seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (if
equipped) and a set of desired radio station presets. Your
remote keyless entry key fob can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the unlock button is
pushed.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other
key fob can be linked to memory position 2.
The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat cushion.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors and radio
station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
Memory Seat Buttons
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster dis-
play will show which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob.
NOTE: Before programming your key fobs to memory the
feature has to be selected.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, you must
select the “Memory Linked To Fob” feature through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, you
must select the “Key Fob Linked To Memory” feature
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ for instructions on
how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the
set (S) button on the memory switch, then push and
release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster
display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10 seconds,
followed by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the vehicle speed must be lower than 5 mph (8 km/h) to
recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), a
message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall
memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the
vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch, push memory button (1) on the
memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 1.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory switch, push memory button (2) on the
memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is
cancelled, the driver’s seat and the power pedals (if
equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where
you have the driver’s seat positioned when you remove the
key fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for
vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
• When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position
is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward
of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the ignition into the ACC or
RUN position.
• When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move to a
position 0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if
the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 inches and
2.7 inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because
of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low tempera-
tures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns
due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located on the
center instrument panel below the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front
heated seats control buttons are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn off automatically after approxi-
mately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driv-
er’s seat can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature
can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats
are located on the rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently. You can
choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two
indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none
for OFF.
• Push the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Push the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
• Push the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number
of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-
cally after approximately 45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the air
from the passenger compartment and move air through
fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver
and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located on the
center instrument panel below the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front
ventilated seats control buttons are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to turn
the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the venti-
lated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature
can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Manual Folding Rear Seats (Mega Cab Models)
Folding Rear Seat — Table Mode
Both the left and right rear seat backs can be folded down
and used as a table.
To fold down either rear seat back:
1. Lift the handle, located next to the head restraint.
Table Mode Handle
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Fold the seat back forward.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
3. Lift the seat back, to return the seat to the upright
position. Be sure the seat back is locked in place.
Manual Folding Rear Seat — Fold Flat
Both the outboard rear seats will drop and move forward
when the seat back is folded flat.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured cargo can fly
around in a sudden stop or collision and strike
someone in the vehicle, causing serious injury or
death.
Table Mode
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
To fold either rear seat flat:
1. Lift the handle, located on the outboard side of either of
the rear seats.
2. Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward.
3. Lift the seat back, to return the seat to the upright
position. Be sure the seat is locked in place.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
Folding Rear Seat Handle
Rear Passenger Fold-Flat Seats
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury
or death. Make sure that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback in not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab Models)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles
are built into the back panel of the cab, behind the rear seat.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Grocery Bag Hooks
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and removable
head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint
and push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Buttons
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Release/Adjustment Buttons
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad Cab)
has only one adjustment position that is used to aid in
the routing of a tether. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Safety” for further information.
• Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clear-
ance to the back of the head.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go.
Then, push the adjustment button and the release button at
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into
the holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Rear Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button
and the release button while pulling upward on the whole
assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the appropri-
ate height.
NOTE: To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat bottom
must be folded up.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. The tilt lever is located on the steering
column, below the multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Tilt Steering Lever
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an
average of 80 minutes before automatically shutting off.
This time may vary based on the temperature of the
surrounding environment or the heated steering wheel
may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the
center instrument panel below the climate controls. There
are also buttons located within the climate or controls
screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn
the heating element on.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater
range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat
position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, and
clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away from
the driver to provide improved position with the steering
wheel.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the
steering column.
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Speed Control System is on. The
following messages will appear on vehicles equipped
with an instrument cluster display if the pedals are
attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out:
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged”
or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the
best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
can use your remote keyless entry key fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return
the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed positions. Re-
fer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or
impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage to
the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjust-
able pedal’s path.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen.
• Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature
on.
• Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature off.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
Display — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a coun-
terclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear, a video
display illuminates to display the image generated by the
rear view camera located on the tailgate handle. The auto
dimming feature is also disabled to improve rear view
viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated ap-
proach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be turned
off through the instrument cluster display or the Uconnect
display. For further information, refer to “Instrument Clus-
ter Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will
not have a convex passenger side mirror.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automati-
cally adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
adjusts.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch.
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right)
button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
Power Mirror Controls Location
Power Mirror Controls
1 — Mirror Select Buttons
2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard
And Trailer Tow — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located be-
tween the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the
switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the
normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a
potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors
back to the home position. If the mirror does not electri-
cally fold, check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area
which can cause excessive drag.
Power Mirror Movement
Power Folding Mirror Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To Reset The Power Folding Mirrors:
1. Using the power folding mirror switch, move the mirror
to its full forward position.
2.
Using the power folding mirror switch, move the mirror to
the full retract position (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
NOTE:
• The power fold mirrors are designed to operate while
the vehicle is stationary or traveling at moderate speeds.
If you attempt to power fold the mirrors at high speeds
they may not fully open or close. You should slow down
to a moderate speed and complete the operation.
• When pushing the power fold button 10 or more times
in one minute the system shuts down for one minute to
protect the motors from over heating.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manually
folded both forward and rearward to prevent damage.
Folding Mirror
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a car
wash or a narrow location.
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head
to provide a greater vision range when towing extra-wide
loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror
head should be rotated (flipped in or out).
NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to
entering an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror and
can be adjusted separately.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in this section for further information.
Trailer Towing Position
Blindspot Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored
memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In
Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor. To
use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor —
If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod”
until the sun visor is in the desired position.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight
switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights
(if equipped).
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender Headlight Switch Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less suscep-
tible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens clean-
ing procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated ap-
proach lights under the outside mirrors they can be turned
off through the instrument cluster display or the Uconnect
radio. For further information refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” and
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise to the headlight position. When the headlight
switch is on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate light
and instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn off
the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O
(off) position.
Headlight Position
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except
PARK. This provides a constant ⬙lights on⬙ condition until
the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than
half of normal intensity. If the parking brake is applied, the
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn
signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the
vehicle may turn off for the duration of the turn signal
activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL
lamp will illuminate.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the multi-
function lever back toward the steering wheel will turn the
low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera de-
tects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
High/Low Beam Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto Dim
High Beams” within your Uconnect settings, as well as
turning the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur-
ther information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See a local authorized dealer.
To Activate
1. The Automatic High Beams are enabled through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
2.
Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at
or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in
vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain
on, until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OFF position. The headlight time delay can be pro-
grammed 0/30/60/90 seconds. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn
off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to
the O (off) position.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if
the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Automatic Headlight Position
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated
when the ignition is turned off while the headlight switch
is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be canceled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are
on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An
indicator light located in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights
will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time,
when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
the high beam is selected.
Fog Light Switch
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster display will flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defec-
tive.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) are turned on
by pushing the cargo lights button located just below the
headlight switch.
Turn Signal Lever
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
If the vehicle’s speed is 0 mph (0 km/h), these lights can
also be turned on using the switch located just inside the
pickup box. A telltale will illuminate in the instrument
cluster display when this lights are on. Pushing the switch
a second time will turn the lights off.
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn on for
approximately 60 seconds when a key fob unlock button is
pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
Bed Light Switch Without RamBox
Bed Light Switch With RamBox
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes
or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome
on position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automati-
cally turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF,
the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight
minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for
eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far right
detent position. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote
Keyless Entry, and the unlock button is pushed on the key
fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn on.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
unlock button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry key fob,
if equipped. These lights are also operated individually as
reading lights by pushing on the corresponding lens.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before exiting the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned off, they will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
Ambient Light
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility
of the floor console area.
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light
Ambient Light
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Control
The brightness of the instrument panel as well as the
ambient lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer
control to the right (brighter) or to the left (dimmer).
“Party Mode”
When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating
the dimmer control all the way left, to the off detent, will
cause all the interior lights to go out. This is also known as
the ⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows the doors to stay open
for extended periods of time without discharging the
vehicle’s battery.
“Parade Mode”
When the headlights are on you can supplement the
brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and
overhead console by rotating the control to the right until
you hear a click. This feature is termed the “Parade” mode
and is useful when headlights are required during the day.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the
dimming of the touchscreen is programmable through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further details.
Illuminated Approach
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
Dimmer Control
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (rotate vertical thumb wheel all the
way to the top detent).
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotate
vertical thumb wheel all the way to the bottom detent).
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated ap-
proach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be turned
off by moving the instrument panel dimmer into the
“Dome Defeat” detent position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the lever to select the
desired wiper speed.
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past
the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For maxi-
mum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob upward
to the first detent.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it
enters the low continual speed position. The delay can be
regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between
cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will
double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph
(16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the
second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper
will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is
released from this position.
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range,
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer
knob is released. It will then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed
while in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle
approximately three times after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a
passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, located
on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the first
detent and release. The wipers will cycle one time and
automatically shut off.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and auto-
matically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is
especially useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate
this feature.
NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive.
Position 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Positions 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Positions 4 and 5 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the O
(off) position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the igni-
tion is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL
position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until
the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, Rain Sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be
set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Manual Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Setting
Rotate the Temperature Control Knob counterclockwise until it is set to MAX A/C.
This is the coldest setting and will put the A/C to its maximum power.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and
the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment.
Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates
cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control knob to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the
control clockwise from the off position.
Modes Control:
Rotate the Mode Control Knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution
mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem-
perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
Manual Climate Controls With A Touchscreen
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With Manual Temperature Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Manual Climate Control With Touchscreen Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Setting
Press the button on the touchscreen to select MAX A/C. This is the coldest setting and will put
the A/C to its maximum power.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button on the touchscreen or faceplate to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C).
A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Front Defrost Setting
Push the button to activate Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Temperature Control
Press the arrows on the touchscreen or faceplate to regulate the temperature of the air inside the
passenger compartment. Pressing the down arrow indicates cooler temperatures, and pressing
the up arrow indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Press the buttons to regulate the amount of air forced through
the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clock-
wise from the off position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate
the temperature control knob to the desired temperature.
Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor
modes.
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Controls With A Touchscreen
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display With Automatic Temperature Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With Automatic Temperature Controls
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Control Descriptions
NOTE:
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle equipment.
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate,
to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Icon Description
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to
change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature
is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button
is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the
front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate,
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after ten minutes.
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow
button on the faceplate, press the up arrow button on the touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings. Push the down arrow button on the faceplate, press the down arrow button on the
touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s
temperature will move up and down with the driver’s temperature, when it is increased and
decreased, respectively.
NOTE: Temperature numbers will only be displayed if the system is equipped with Automatic
Temperature Control.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Icon Description
SYNC Button — If Equipped
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the
passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. The SYNC feature also
synchronizes the rear passengers’ temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the
passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system.
There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower
control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons. For Uconnect 3, press the button to access the blower screen and
control the blower.
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the faceplate button, to turn the
Climate Control System off.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior
settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recircula-
tion mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve
window clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled auto-
matically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the
control button to blink and then turns off.
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera-
ture is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-
cally maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea-
ture. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De-
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
The power window controls located on the driver’s door
trim panel have up-down switches that give you fingertip
control of all power windows. There is a single opening
and closing switch on the front passenger door for passen-
ger window control and on the rear doors of the Quad Cab
and Crew Cab models. The windows will operate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC position,
and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or
until a front door is opened.
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Switches
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switch have
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the
first detent, release, and the window will go down auto-
matically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the
switch in either the up or down direction and release the
switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, push to the switch to the
first detent and release it when you want the window to
stop.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
(4-Door Models Driver And Front Passenger Door
Only) — If Equipped
Pull the window switch fully upward to the second detent,
release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the
Auto-Closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road
conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpect-
edly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window
manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch (4–Door Models Only)
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the rear passenger
doors. To disable the window controls on the rear passen-
ger doors, push the window lock switch into the latched or
down position. To enable the window controls, push the
window lock switch again and return the switch to the
released or up position.
Window Lockout Switch
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on
the overhead console.
Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the
switch to the left to close the glass.
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the lock
to release the window.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Rear Window Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead
console between the courtesy/reading lights.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open
operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will
stop the sunroof.
Manual
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the move-
ment. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruc-
tion in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF/LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
To Open The Hood
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering
wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it,
before raising the hood.
To Close The Hood
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from
the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the
hood is completely closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Release
Safety Latch Location (1500 Series Shown)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
TAILGATE
Opening
To open the tailgate, lift up on the handle and pull the
tailgate down.
Closing
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both sides are
latched.
NOTE: Pull back on the tailgate firmly after closing to
ensure it is securely latched.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink channels.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
(Continued)
HomeLink Buttons
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
federal safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features. Call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before
you begin programming.
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds. The instrument
cluster display will display “CLEARING CHANNELS.”
Release the buttons when “CHANNELS CLEARED” ap-
pears on the display.
NOTE:
• For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place
the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the
engine ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or
that the garage door remains open at all times.
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identi-
fied by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and
close the door. The name and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand - held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument
cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both
buttons.
NOTE:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
for the channel to train.
• If “DID NOT TRAIN” appears in the Instrument
Cluster Display, repeat from Step 2.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). The instrument cluster display will
show “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If the garage door
opener/device activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand - held
transmitter button.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument
cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both
buttons.
NOTE:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
for the channel to train.
• If the instrument cluster display shows “DID NOT
TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The
instrument cluster display will display “CHANNEL #
TRANSMIT.” If the garage door opener/device acti-
vates, programming is complete.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remain-
ing steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the
ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. Make
sure while programming HomeLink with the engine ON
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button while you push
and release (“cycle”), your hand - held transmitter every
two seconds.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument
cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both
buttons.
NOTE:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
for the channel to train.
• If the instrument cluster display shows “DID NOT
TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The
instrument cluster display will display “CHANNEL #
TRANSMIT.” If the device is plugged in and activates,
programming is complete.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the
ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. Make
sure while programming HomeLink with the engine ON
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
instrument cluster display shows “CHANNEL #
TRAINING” Do not release the button.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To erase the channels press and hold the two outside
HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The
instrument cluster display will display “CLEARING
CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the instrument
cluster display shows “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
member to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower
storage area.
To open the upper glove compartment, push upward on
the handle release. The glove compartment door will
automatically open.
Glove Compartment
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
Upper Glove Compartment
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders (driver’s side only) are
located in the door trim panels.
Lower Glove Compartment
Front Door Storage
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the driver and
passenger rear door trim panels.
Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located between the
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment
provides an armrest and contains both and upper and
lower storage area.
WARNING!
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or a collision. Only use the center seating
position when the armrest is fully upright.
• In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight
of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
These items could be thrown about endangering
occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should not
exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
Rear Door Storage
Center Storage Compartment
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise
the cover. The upper storage area contains a USB power outlet
that can be used to power small electrical devices, refer to
“Electrical Power Outlets” for further information.
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to open
the lower storage bin.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
Upper Storage Compartment
Lower Storage Bin
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
The center console is equipped with a front storage bin
located next to the cupholders. This storage bin may be
equipped with a manual sliding top door.
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front
seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
Front Storage Bin With Door — If Equipped
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second row
seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage bins
have removable liners that can be easily removed for
cleaning.
To open in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the handle of
the latch and open the lid.
NOTE: The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch
Opened Storage Bin
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125
Storage Bin (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs
the length of the cab.
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
Quad Cab and Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat
may be equipped with a folding load floor.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or
sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor may
move around with force and strike occupants, resulting
in serious or fatal injury.
Unfolding The Load Floor/Quad Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
Storage Bin
Unfolding The Load Floor
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until
the load floor unfolds into position.
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
Load Floor In Open Position
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps. 3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds into
position.
4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position
Load Floor In Open Position
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access
Under The Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious
injury.
Quad Cab — If Equipped
Load Floor Securing Straps/Quad Cab
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129
Crew Cab — If Equipped
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the
secured down position before you operate the vehicle.
Below Rear Seat Storage (Crew Cab/Quad Cab)
The Crew Cab and Quad Cab models provide additional
storage under the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the
storage compartment.
To open the storage compartments, unsnap the securing
snap located at either side of the load floor and lift upward
on the fold flat lid.
NOTE: For more information on storage and the fold flat
floor, refer to “Fold Flat Load Floor” in this section.
Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab
Crew Cab Storage
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cupholders
Front Seat Cupholders
For vehicles equipped with bucket seats, two cupholders
are located next to the center console storage bin.
Vehicles Equipped With 40/20/40 Seats
The cupholders are located on the backside of the center
portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the center section
of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders.
Rear Cupholders — If Equipped
Some vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders located
in the center armrest.
Front Cupholders For Bucket Seats
Rear Armrest Cupholder
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131
Some vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder that
consists of two cup wells for rear passenger convenience.
Electrical Power Outlets
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide
power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets
and USB Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the
outlet indicating “12V DC,” together with either a key
symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide
power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is
connected to the battery, and can provide power at all
times.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im-
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Rear Cup Wells
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following
locations:
• Lower left and lower right of the center stack when
equipped with a bench seat.
• Center console when equipped with bucket seats.
Power Outlets — Center Stack
1 — Power Outlet
2 — USB Port (Charge Only)
Power Outlet — Center Console
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133
• Rear of the center console storage compartment —
Quad Cab or Crew Cab.
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console Fuse
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any
equipment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle. All
accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be removed or
turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console Bin /
USB Port (Charge Only)
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear Center Console
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver — If Equipped
A removable cigar lighter and ash receiver are available.
For vehicles with a bench seat, the cup holder tray can be
used to hold the ash receiver.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
A 115 or 230 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on
the center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the
radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset.
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. The
outlet automatically turns off when the device is un-
plugged.
NOTE:
• The Power Inverter will only turn on if the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
• Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter
will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
Power Inverter Outlet
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped
There can be up to five auxiliary switches located in the
lower switch bank of the instrument panel which can be
used to power various electronic devices and PTO (Power
Take Off) – If Equipped. If Power Take Off is equipped, it
will take the place of the fifth Auxiliary switch. Connec-
tions to the switches are found under the hood in the
connectors attached to the auxiliary Power Distribution
Center.
You have the ability to configure the functionality of the
auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster display. All
switches can now be configured for setting the switch type
operation to latching or momentary, power source of either
battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state across key
cycles.
NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch
type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
For further information on using the auxiliary switches,
please refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide by accessing
www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the appropriate
links.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 137
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for utility and
convenience.
NOTE: If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or
Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you must
use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets that are available
from an authorized dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood,
etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber across the
box in the indentations provided above the wheel housings
and in the bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
WARNING!
• The pickup box is intended for load carrying pur-
poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
• Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds may
need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may
cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may
result in vehicle damage. If wide building materials
are to be frequently carried, the installation of a
support is recommended. This will restrain the cargo
and transfer the load to the pickup box floor.
• If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse, supports
must be installed to transfer the weight of the load to
the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may result.
The use of proper supports will permit loading up to
the rated payload.
• Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an
accident causing serious or fatal injury.
Pick Up Box Features
1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
3 — Cleats
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side
bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel
housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side to
side to create separate load compartments in the pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of
the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs
(450 kg) total.
Cargo Camera — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo Camera that
allows you to see an image of the inside of the pickup box.
The image will be displayed in the Uconnect screen.
The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center area of
the center high-mounted stoplamp (CHMSL).
A touchscreen button
to indicate the current active
camera image being displayed is made available when-
ever the Cargo Camera image is displayed.
Also, a touchscreen button
to switch the display to
rear view camera image is made available whenever the
Cargo Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in RE-
VERSE gear.
A display timer is initiated when the Cargo Camera image
is displayed. The image will continue to be displayed until
the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle speed
is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to
disable display of the Cargo Camera image is pressed.
NOTE:
• If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the
Cargo Camera image will be displayed continuously
until the touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the
Cargo Camera image is pressed.
• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off —
With Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Cargo Camera” button
to turn the Cargo
Camera system on.
NOTE: Once initiated by the ⬙Cargo Camera⬙ button, the
Cargo Camera image may be deactivated by pressing the
⬙X⬙ soft button. On deactivation, the previous selected
screen will appear.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 139
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage
and cargo management system consisting of three features:
• Integrated box side storage bins
• Cargo extender/divider
• Bed rail tie-down system
RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup
box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable,
illuminated storage for up to 150 lbs (68 kg) for 1500 series
vehicles or 300 lbs (136 kg) for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles
of evenly distributed cargo.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
• Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
properly secured.
• Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb (68 kg)
1500 series vehicles or 300 lbs (136 kg) for 2500 and
3500 series vehicles per bin.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked, push and
release the button located on the lid. The RamBox lid will
open upward to allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully
open.
NOTE: RamBox will not open when the pushbutton is
pushed if the RamBox is locked.
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the lid
is required to stay open for extended periods of time, it
is recommended that the bin lights be turned off
manually using the on/off switch.
The interior of the RamBox will automatically illuminate
when the lid is opened. In addition to the automatic
illumination switch, there is a manual on/off switch lo-
cated at the rear of each storage bin.
RamBox Pushbutton And Lock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 141
Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights,
pushing the switch again will turn the lights back on.
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow
water to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on the
edge. To install push plug downward into drain hole.
NOTE: Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in addition
to other RamBox accessories) are available from Mopar.
Locking And Unlocking RamBox
Push and release the lock or unlock button on the key fob
to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox
(if equipped). Refer to “Keys” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further details. The RamBox storage bins can
be locked using the vehicle key. To lock and unlock the
storage bin, insert the key into the keyhole on the push
button and turn clockwise to lock or counterclockwise to
unlock. Always return the key to the upright (vertical)
position before removing the key from the push button.
CAUTION!
• Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before
moving or driving vehicle.
• Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be
minimized to prevent damage to the lid and latching/
hinging mechanisms.
• Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to heavy/
sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to vehicle
motion. In order to minimize potential for damage,
secure all cargo to prevent movement and protect
inside surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects with
appropriate padding.
RamBox Light Switch
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RamBox Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the storage
bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may
not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
• In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while
the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
— If Equipped
As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mecha-
nism.
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 143
Bed Extender — If Equipped
The bed extender has three functional positions:
• Storage Position
• Divider Position
• Extender Position
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of
the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when
not in use.
To install the bed extender into the storage position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.
Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. With the side gates open, position the extender fully
forward in the bed against the front panel.
3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard ends
to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops.
Storage Position Cargo Tie Down Loop
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 145
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side
gates in the closed position.
5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure
the panel into place.
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your cargo
and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the
bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels
which allow for various positions to assist in managing
your cargo.
To install the bed extender into a divider position, perform
the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.
Side Gates Closed
Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. With the side gates open, position the extender so the
outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides
of the bed.
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends
are secured into the intended slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side
gates in the closed position.
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place.
Aligning Gate To Slots
Side Gates Closed
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 147
Extender Position
The extender position allows you to load the bed of the
truck beyond the tail gate. The bed extender will add an
additional 15 inches (38 cm) in the back of the truck when
additional cargo room is needed. The extender position
utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both
sides of the truck bed near the tailgate.
To install the bed extender into the extender position,
perform the following:
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the
center handle vertically in order to release the extender
side gates.
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and handle.
Extender Position
Extender Installation
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure
into place.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of potential injury or property
damage:
• Cargo must be secured.
• Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle.
• Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs.
• Extender should not be used as cargo tie down.
• When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg) load on the tailgate.
• The bed extender is not intended for off road use.
• When not in use, the extender/divider should be in
stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed.
• When in use all handles are to be in the locked
position.
Locking Tab
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 149
Bed Rail Tie-Down System
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 lbs
(113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat should
not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or damage to
the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed that
can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of
the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo
properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull out
on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the desired
location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and
tighten the nut.
Adjustable Cleats
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end
cap screw located in the center of the end cap, using a #T30
Torx head driver. Remove the end cap and slide the cleat
off the end of the rail.
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the “Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load-
ing” document available from an authorized dealer. For
safety reasons, follow all instructions in this important
document.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the over-
hanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.
NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate Center High-Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) must be provided.
Utility Rail End Cap
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 151
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera or
Remote Keyless Entry, the electrical connector must be
disconnected prior to removing the tailgate.
Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote
Keyless Entry — If Equipped
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or Remote
Keyless Entry connector bracket located on the rear sill.
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by pushing
inward in the locking tab.
Connector Bracket
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the
connector bracket does not fall into the sill.
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the
glove compartment) to the chassis wiring harness and
insert the bracket back into the sill.
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove com-
partment) to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that
the terminals do not corrode.
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the
forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will prevent
damaging the connector and bracket when storing or
reinstalling the tailgate.
Removing The Tailgate
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera and
or power locks (if equipped), refer to “Disconnecting
The Rear Camera — If Equipped” in this section.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by
releasing the lock tang from the pivot.
NOTE: Make sure tailgate is supported when removing
support cables.
Locking Tab
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 153
3. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle.
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side
pivot clears the hanger bracket.
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side
pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE: Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup
box.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the over-
hanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.
Locking Tailgate
The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. The tailgate
can be locked using the vehicle key or by locking the truck
with the key fob if equipped with remote keyless entry.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri-Fold Tonneau
Cover which consists of different features:
• Easy Tri-Fold cover
• Tonneau fore aft locator
• Crosscar inside bed locator
• Front and rear clamps
• Stowage strap
• Locking capability
Locking Tang
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and secured
at the front of the box without removing completely.
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal
To remove the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:
1. Lower the tailgate to gain access to the first set of two
Tonneau Cover clamps located on the driver and pas-
senger underside of the Tonneau Cover.
2. Pull down on the first set of clamps on both driver and
passenger sides to the semi clamped position.
Clamped Position
NOTE: If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
Semi Clamped Position
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 155
3. Pull down on the clamp wire and push the clamp up
into the proper released position.
CAUTION!
Make sure the tonneau cover clamp and clamp wire are
in the proper released position. If the clamp and clamp
wire are not properly released, damage to the tonneau
cover material will result.
4. Pick up on the Tonneau Cover and fold it back onto the
second panel.
Proper Released Position Second Panel Position
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pick up on the cover and fold it back onto the third
panel.
6. Once in the third panel position, pull down on the
second set of clamps on both driver and passenger sides
to the semi clamped position.
NOTE: When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid damage to the
cover material.
Third Panel Position
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 157
7. Pull down on the clamp wire and push the clamp up
into the proper released position.
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together Semi Clamped Position
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
8. Be sure to clip both stowage straps together to ensure
the cover stays together.
9. With two people, remove the cover.
NOTE: Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded com-
pletely before removing.
Proper Released Position Stowage Strap
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 159
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation
To install the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed and
push the cover forward against the front of the truck
bed. The Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed on
the vehicle.
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to release the
clamps from the stowed position.
3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or
flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi clamped
position.
Stowed Position
Semi Clamped Position
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to
properly engage the clamps.
NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially
clamped to the truck bed flange.
5. Disengage the stowage straps.
Clamped Position
Improper Clamp Position
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 161
6. Unfold Tonneau Cover to the intermediate position.
NOTE: The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position.
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
NOTE: When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid damage to the
cover material.
Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven) Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together Fully Unfolded Position
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 163
8. Pull down on the second set of clamp handles to release
the clamps from the stowed position.
9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or
flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi clamped
position.
Stowed Position
Semi Clamped Position
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to
properly engage the clamps.
NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially
clamped to the truck bed flange.
Clamped Position Improper Clamp Position
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 165
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in the
clamped position by placing a lock through the locking
hole.
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the Tonneau
Cover is properly installed on the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure can result in detachment of the
Tonneau Cover from the vehicle and/or damage to the
vehicle/Tonneau Cover.
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use Mopar
Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar Leather & Vinyl
Conditioner/Protectant.
Locking Hole
166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..............168
▫ Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions .........168
䡵 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..........170
▫ Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....170
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........172
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Controls .........173
▫ Display Menu Screens ...................175
▫ Oil Life Reset..........................177
▫ Display Messages.......................178
▫ Display Menu Items .....................181
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ..................189
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .........191
▫ Red Warning Lights .....................191
▫ Yellow Warning Lights ...................195
▫ Yellow Indicator Lights ...................199
▫ Green Indicator Lights ...................201
▫ White Indicator Lights ...................202
▫ Blue Indicator Lights ....................202
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .203
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................203
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................204
4
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Base Instrument Clusters
168 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And Mainte-
nance.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
• When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the
electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay
within the normal range if the battery is charged. If the
Premium Instrument Clusters
170 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
pointer moves to either extreme left or right and
remains there during normal driving, the electrical
system should be serviced.
NOTE:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is caused
by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system.
The number of cycles and the length of the cycling operation
is controlled by the engine control module. Post-heat opera-
tion can run for several minutes, and then the electrical system
and voltmeter needle will stabilize.
3. Oil Pressure Gauge
• The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure
when the engine is running. A continuous high or low
reading under normal driving conditions may indicate
a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service
should be obtained from an authorized dealer.
4. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
6. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
7. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And Mainte-
nance.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important informa-
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how sys-
tems are working and give you warnings when they are
not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to
scroll through the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and make selec-
tions and adjustments.
172 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
The instrument cluster display menu items may consist of
the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Audio
• Trailer Tow
Base Instrument Cluster Display
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Vehicle Settings (Not equipped with a Uconnect touch-
screen radio)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following instrument cluster display control
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel:
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu items, submenu
screen, and vehicle settings.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu items, sub-
menu screen, and vehicle settings.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access/select the information screens or sub-
menu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to
reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access/
select the information screens, submenu screens
of a main menu item, or to return to the main
menu.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
174 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Menu Screens
The instrument cluster display screens are located in the
center portion of the cluster and consists of seven sections:
1. Compass Display
Displays the current direction. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
2. Temperature Display
Displays the outside temperature in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
3. Main Screen
Displays main menu, submenus, settings.
4. White Telltales
5. Amber Telltales
6. Red Telltales
7. Audio/Phone Information And Submenu Information
Base Instrument Cluster Display
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
The instrument cluster display screens are located in the
center portion of the cluster and consists of eight sections:
1. Main Screen
The inner ring of the display will illuminate in grey under
normal conditions, yellow for non critical warnings, red for
critical warnings, and white for on demand information.
2. Audio / Phone Information and Submenu Information
Whenever there are submenus available, the position
within the submenus is shown here.
3. Selectable Information (Compass, Outside Temp, Range
to Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Trailer
Trip (distance only), Trailer Brake Gain, Time)
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Gear Selector Status
6. Selectable Menu Icons
7. Air Suspension Status – If Equipped
8. 4WD Status
9. Selectable Gauge 2 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life,
Trailer Brake, Current Fuel Economy)
10. Selectable Gauge 1 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life,
Trailer Brake, Current fuel economy)
The instrument cluster display area will normally display
the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
main menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes-
sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
176 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and
then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages
of this type are then stored (as long as the condition that
activated it remains active) and can be reviewed from the
“Messages” main menu item. As long as there is a stored
message, an “i” will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this mes-
sage type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low
Tire Pressure.”
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is
in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes-
sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds
and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this
message type is “Automatic High Beams On.”
Oil Life Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
NOTE: Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
controls for the following procedure(s).
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the
”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up or down to select
“Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select “Reset”.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
5. Push and release the down arrow button to select “Yes,”
then push and release the right arrow button to select
reset of the Oil Life to 100%.
6. Push and release the up arrow button to exit the
instrument cluster display screen.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the
“Vehicle Info” screen then scroll up or down to select
“Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select “YES” by
pushing the right arrow then push and release the right
arrow button to select reset of the Oil Life to 100%.
5. Push and release the up arrow button to exit the
instrument cluster display screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the Oil Life indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Display Messages
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Airbag System
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(S) “Inflate Tire To
XX”
178 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
• Sound Horn With Remote Lock: Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
• Vehicle Not In Park
• Key In Ignition
• Key In Ignition Lights On
• Remote Start Active Key To Run
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
• Service Airbag System
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift To Neutral Then Drive Or Reverse
• Autostick Unavailable Service Required
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift To Park Wait To Cool
• Transmission Cool Ready To Drive
• Trailer Brake Disconnected
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
• Engage Park Brake To Prevent Rolling
• Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On
• Washer Fluid Low
• Service Air Suspension System
• Heavy Duty Air Suspension System Disabled
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Speed
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Payload
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted - Payload Too Light
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
• Normal Ride Height Achieved
• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
• Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
• Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
• Service Air Suspension System Immediately
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height
• Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait
• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
• Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance
• Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance
• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And
Tire Change
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
180 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Menu Items
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
speedometer menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to
cycle the display between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. Follow the
directional prompts to access or reset any of the following
Vehicle Info submenu items:
• Tire Pressure
• Transmission Temp (Automatic only)
• Oil Temp
• Oil Life
• Fuel Filter Life
• Battery Voltage — If Equipped
• Gauge Summary — If Equipped
• Engine Hours
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and Hold the right arrow button to
reset Average Fuel Economy.
• Current Fuel Economy Gauge
• Average Fuel Economy Value
• Range To Empty
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Trip A/Trip B
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right arrow button to enter
the submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B
information will display the following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Push and hold right arrow button to reset all information.
Trailer Tow
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trailer
Tow menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right arrow button and the next
screen will display the following trailer trip information:
• Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold the right
arrow button to reset the distance.
• Trailer Brake
• Output
• Type
• Gain
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Audio display icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right arrow button to display
the active source.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing the right
arrow button will allow you to see what the stored
messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a
closed envelope.
Screen Setup Menu Item
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
182 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
• None
• Compass (Default Setting)
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake Gain
Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (Default Setting)
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake Gain
Lower Left
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trailer Brake Gain
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Lower Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trailer Brake Gain
Lower Gauge
• None
• Trans Temp
• Oil Temp
• Oil Life
• Fuel Filter Life (Diesel)
• Battery Voltage (Diesel)
• Current MPG
• Trailer Brake
Odometer
• No Decimals (Default Setting)
• Decimals
Restore Defaults
• Cancel (Default Setting)
• Ok
Settings — If Equipped
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK.
Push and release the up and down button until Settings
displays in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the prompts to display and set any of the following
Vehicle Settings.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
settings.
•
If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touchscreen) Vehicle
Settings will be included in the instrument cluster display.
• If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the Vehicle Set-
tings will be included in the radio head unit.
184 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbre-
viated (Left Submenu
Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
1 Language Select Language English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch, Portu-
guese, Arabic (If Equipped)
2 Units Units U.S.; Metric
3 ParkSense ParkSense
• Notification — Sound Only; Sound & Display
• Front Volume — Low; Medium; High
• Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
4 Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On; Off
5 Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On; Off
6 Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist On; Off
7 Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
8 Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
9 Headlights On with
Wipers
Lights w/ Wipers On; Off
10 Automatic Highbeams Auto Highbeams On; Off
11 Flash Lights with
Lock
Lights w/ Lock On; Off
12 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On; Off
13 Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbre-
viated (Left Submenu
Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
14 Sound Horn with Re-
mote Start
Horn w/ Rmt Start On; Off
15 Sound Horn with Re-
mote Lock
Horn w/ Rmt Lock Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
16 Remote Unlock Se-
quence
Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors
17 Key Fob Linked to
Memory
Key in Memory On; Off
18 Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off
19 Remote Start Comfort
System
Rmt Start Comfort Off; Remote Start; All starts
20 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On; Off
21 Key-off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes
22 Commercial Settings Commercial
• Aux Switches
• Power Take-Off
• PIN Setup
NOTE: If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known,
see an authorized dealer to have the PIN reset.
186 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbre-
viated (Left Submenu
Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
23 Air Suspension Dis-
play Alerts
Air Susp. Alerts All; Warnings Only
24 Aero Ride Height
Mode
Aero Mode On; Off
25 Tire/Jack Mode Tire/Jack Mode On; Off
26 Transport Mode Transport Mode On; Off
27 Wheel Alignment
Mode
Wheel Alignment On; Off
28 Horn w/ Remote
Lower
Horn w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off
29 Lights w/ Remote
Lower
Lights w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off
30 Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4
31 Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy EOH
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbre-
viated (Left Submenu
Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
32 Trailer Name Trailer Name
• Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)
• Boat
• Car
• Cargo
• Dump
• Equipment
• Flatbed
• Gooseneck
• Horse
• Livestock
• Motorcycle
• Snowmobile
• Travel
• Utility
• 5th Wheel
33 Compass Variance Compass Var 1-15 increments of 1
34 Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate
35 Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver On; Off
188 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbre-
viated (Left Submenu
Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
36 Park Assist Front
Chime Volume
Park Assist Front
Chime Volume
On; Off
37 Park Assist Rear
Chime Volume
Park Assist Rear Chime
Volume
On; Off
Turn Menu Off — If Equipped
Push and release the right arrow button to exit the main
menu.
Push and release any instrument cluster display control
button to enter the instrument cluster display main menu
again.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electri-
cal accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de-
vices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
consoles and similar devices.
190 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad-
ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys-
tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the mes-
sage is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the infor-
mation contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are
advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure indica-
tion. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with
the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, in-
cluding brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
192 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15
seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the tempera-
ture reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound
for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool:
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact
an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the
problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with
the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
194 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
— Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the Trailer Brake
has been disconnected.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and
not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
chime.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve-
hicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Stability
Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine run-
ning, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
196 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
— Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L)
this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function-
ing and service is required as soon as possible. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
198 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant
level is low.
— Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap
is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light.
If the light does not turn off, please see an authorized
dealer.
— Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the
4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. We recommend you
drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the
maximum payload may have been exceeded or load level-
ing cannot be achieved at its current ride height. Protection
Mode will automatically be selected in order to “protect”
the air suspension system, air suspension adjustment is
limited due to payload.
— Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is
set to the Off-Road 1 setting. For further information, refer
to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And Operating.”
— Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is
set to the Off-Road 2 setting. For further information, refer
to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And Operating”.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
/ — Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is
set to the Aerodynamic setting.
— Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator
Light— If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver that the vehicle is
changing to a higher ride height.
— Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver that the vehicle is
changing to a lower ride height.
— Cargo Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the cargo light is
activated by pushing the cargo light button on the head-
light switch.
— 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive mode, and the front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
— 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear drive-
shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased
torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information on four-
wheel drive operation and proper use.
— Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light— If
Equipped
This light comes on when the vehicle is automatically
lowered from ride height position downward for easy
entry and exit of the vehicle.
— TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when TOW/HAUL
mode is selected.
200 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature
is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into PARK
and run the engine at idle or slightly higher until the light
turns off.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Green Indicator Lights
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
— Speed Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With 7 Inch Instrument Cluster Display
This light will turn on when the speed control is set.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
— 4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive auto mode, and the front axle is engaged,
but the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-
wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the
vehicle senses a loss of traction.
For further information on four-wheel drive operation and
proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
White Indicator Lights
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when the speed control
is ready, but not set.
— Speed Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With 3.5 Inch Instrument Cluster Display
This light will turn on when the speed control is set. Refer
to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC)
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC
is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is
in the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met
while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indi-
cator light will flash on/off.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
scenario.
202 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating prop-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
•
ONLY an authorized service technician should connect
equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to
read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
•
Access, or allow others to access, information stored
in your vehicle systems, including personal informa-
tion.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul-
timedia”.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Main-
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
204 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES ......................208
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............208
▫ Electronic Brake Control System ............209
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .............221
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......221
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........227
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features ........227
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............227
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................228
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........241
▫ Child Restraints .......................259
▫ Transporting Pets ......................285
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................285
▫ Transporting Passengers ..................285
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................286
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................286
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...........................289
5
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
208 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does
not come on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
5
SAFETY 209
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
210 SAFETY
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
5
SAFETY 211
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
212 SAFETY
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within 20
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8.
Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON. If
the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off Indi-
cator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is
disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply
brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine
power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions
similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the
spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be
applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
5
SAFETY 213
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
214 SAFETY
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Mul-
tiple momentary button pushed may be required to return
to ESC On.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
ON again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes if so
equipped.
5
SAFETY 215
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. There-
fore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive ma-
neuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is in-
tended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
216 SAFETY
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
5
SAFETY 217
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Tow-
ing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling ve-
hicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
218 SAFETY
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed
for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the
HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
activate.
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE: During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by
the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the trans-
mission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude,
is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
5
SAFETY 219
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver
about the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is re-
sponsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
220 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for infor-
mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The
tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off once the system receives the updated tire
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS
Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
5
SAFETY 221
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and
the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
222 SAFETY
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a graphic showing the pressure values
of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different
color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in a
different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the graphic display in the instru-
ment cluster will return to it’s original color, and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” Message
5
SAFETY 223
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPMS Warning Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “TPMS Warning Light” will no longer
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of
the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains ma-
terials that may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPM sensor
location condition. When a system fault occurs due to an
incorrect TPM sensor location, the “TPMS Warning Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The
system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instru-
ment cluster will display a “Tire Pressure Temporarily Un-
available” message in place of the tire pressure display screen.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “TPMS Warning Light” will no longer flash
and the tire pressure display screen will be displayed showing
the tire pressure values for the correct locations.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
224 SAFETY
Vehicles With Non Matching Full Size Spare Or Compact
Spare
• The non matching full size spare or compact spare tire
does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the non matching full size
spare or compact spare tire.
• If you install the non matching full size spare or compact
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
switch cycle, the TPMS Warning Light and a “LOW
TIRE” message will remain ON and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will
still display a pressure value in a different color and an
“Inflate to XX” message.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non matching
full size spare or compact spare, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will
turn OFF and the graphic in the instrument cluster will
display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) 3500 Series
Trucks
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Pressure Infor-
mation System (TPIS).
The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
transmit tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
5
SAFETY 225
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPIS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW) applica-
tions)
• Six TPM sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applications)
• Pressure display in the instrument cluster
The TPIS system will display all four (Single Rear Wheel
(SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) appli-
cations) tire pressure values in the instrument cluster
display.
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster will
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a mini-
mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will
no longer be displayed, and a pressure value will display
in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any
of the following:
• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains ma-
terials that may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
226 SAFETY
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS
210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2.
This device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equip-
ment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in the rear
seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5
SAFETY 227
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus-
tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
228 SAFETY
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
5
SAFETY 229
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab, Mega Cab and
Crew Cab front center seating position have combination
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
•
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much
greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You
can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passen-
gers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up
properly.
(Continued)
230 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 231
WARNING! (Continued)
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
232 SAFETY
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
5
SAFETY 233
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
234 SAFETY
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
(Regular Cab Only)
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only) features a
seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows
the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat
is folded. The latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
stored out of the way in the seat for added convenience to
open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front
seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position on the seat.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
5
SAFETY 235
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the
seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in
a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle
for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center
red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide
the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate into its stowed position.
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
236 SAFETY
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in
a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-
latch plate and mini-buckle.
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating Instructions —
If Equipped
The center seating position for the Quad Cab, Mega Cab
and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle the
lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and
pull.
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear
the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and upright in
the seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfort-
able.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
5
SAFETY 237
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
238 SAFETY
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
5
SAFETY 239
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Quad Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
240 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
5
SAFETY 241
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags
will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
242 SAFETY
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both
the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front
air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel,
above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
5
SAFETY 243
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
244 SAFETY
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
5
SAFETY 245
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Ram 1500
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
246 SAFETY
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
5
SAFETY 247
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate
with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk
of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
248 SAFETY
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
5
SAFETY 249
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags may not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is appropri-
ate.
Depending on the version of software in your vehicle, the
Side Air Bags may deploy in one of the following ways:
1. A slower-developing rollover event may deploy the seat
belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-
developing rollover event may deploy the seat belt
pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides
of the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also
deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the
Side Air Bags, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
experiences a near rollover event.
Or
2. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near
rollover event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will also de-
ploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Ram 2500 And 3500
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). If your vehicle is equipped
with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs),
please refer to the information below.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
250 SAFETY
The SABs (if equipped with SABs) may help to reduce the
risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
— If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Side Air
Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). If your vehicle is
equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-
tains (SABICs), please refer to the information below.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
5
SAFETY 251
SABICs (if equipped with SABICs) may help reduce the
risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat
outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts
and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs (if equipped with SABICs) may help reduce
the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
252 SAFETY
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
5
SAFETY 253
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags may not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is appropri-
ate.
Depending on the version of software in your vehicle, the
Side Air Bags may deploy in one of the following ways:
1. A slower-developing rollover event may deploy the seat
belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-
developing rollover event may deploy the seat belt
pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides
of the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also
deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the
Side Air Bags, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
experiences a near rollover event.
Or
2. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near
rollover event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will also de-
ploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
254 SAFETY
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse
the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move
to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
5
SAFETY 255
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention
of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
256 SAFETY
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from
the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical
devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If you have
any doubt, please see an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
5
SAFETY 257
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
258 SAFETY
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
5
SAFETY 259
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–
327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
260 SAFETY
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Children Too Large for Child Re-
straints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
5
SAFETY 261
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
262 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
5
SAFETY 263
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
264 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether
anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchor-
ages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have
a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Label
5
SAFETY 265
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Regular Cab LATCH Positions
Crew/Mega Cabs 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
266 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH sys-
tem once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Quad Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Quad/Crew Cabs Full Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
5
SAFETY 267
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center po-
sition using the inner LATCH lower anchor-
ages?
No Quad Cab or Crew with Full bench rear seat:
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install
a child seat in the center seating position
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints can be removed in each
seating position.
268 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap anchor-
ages behind the front center and right seats.
Quad Cab, Mega Cab and Crew Cab models
have tether strap anchorages located behind each
of the rear seats.
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
Quad Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats
Driver Side
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
5
SAFETY 269
Crew Or Quad Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage Crew Or Quad Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head
Restraint In Raised Position
270 SAFETY
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Regular Cab, Quad Cab, Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear
Seat: No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages Available
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not ap-
proved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
• Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
Mega Cab Or Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center
LATCH Anchorages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the
seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do
not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt,
do not install a child seat in that outboard position.
Mega Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
5
SAFETY 271
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical instal-
lation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
272 SAFETY
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
5
SAFETY 273
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is designed to
hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is
pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s belt
path.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
274 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child re-
straint, up to the recommended weight limit
of the child restraint.
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Quad Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
Cinching Latchplate = Cinching Latchplate
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 275
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child re-
straint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints can be removed in each
seating position.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch
Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted up
to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk
in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. For Crew, Mega, And Quad Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle,
you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
276 SAFETY
For Regular Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as possible to keep
the child as far from the passenger air bag as possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
5
SAFETY 277
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch
Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
278 SAFETY
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-
end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch
plate into the buckle with the release button facing out,
away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
complete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the
buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
installation tight, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
Regular And Mega Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located
behind the center and right passenger seats. In the mega cab
truck, the top tether anchorages are located behind each rear
seating position. There is a plastic cover over each anchorage.
To attach the tether strap of the child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint and to the tether anchor directly behind
the seat.
5
SAFETY 279
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether
strap should go between the head restraint posts under-
neath the head restraint. You may need to adjust the
head restraint to the upward position to pass the tether
strap underneath the head restraint and between its
posts.
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to the
square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the tether
strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air Bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
Mega Cab Tether Anchorages
280 SAFETY
Quad Cab Or Crew Cab Trucks:
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap
loops located between the rear glass and the back of the
rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind each
seating position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether
strap of the child restraint.
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat
and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the
seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the center
seat.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised
Position
5
SAFETY 281
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the center tether strap loop.
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of both
child seats should be connected to the center tether strap
loop. This is the correct way to tether two outboard child
seats.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
282 SAFETY
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat
and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the
seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either the
right or left outboard seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard
tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
5
SAFETY 283
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat. Route
the tether straps following the directions for right and
left seating positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but do
not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route the
tether strap following the directions for the center
seating position, above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions, tightening the right and
left tether straps before the center tether strap.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
284 SAFETY
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
5
SAFETY 285
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
286 SAFETY
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have your authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 287
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
288 SAFETY
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
5
SAFETY 289
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
ENGINE ..............................296
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................296
▫ Tip Start Feature .......................297
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition .............297
▫ Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button ..............................297
▫ Idle Shutdown — 6.4L Engine Only ..........301
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................301
▫ Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ..................302
▫ After Starting..........................302
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .302
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .303
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................303
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............305
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ................307
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .307
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped ..........................307
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 1500 Models
Only (If Equipped) .....................315
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 2500/3500
Models Only ..........................324
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................333
▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped . .333
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Four-Position
Switch) — If Equipped ..................336
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Five-Position
Switch) — If Equipped ..................340
6
▫ Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer
Case (Eight Speed Transmission Only) —
If Equipped ..........................346
▫ Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer
Case (Eight Speed Transmission Only) —
If Equipped ..........................350
䡵 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (1500 MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................354
▫ Description ...........................354
▫ Air Suspension Modes ...................357
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages .........358
▫ Operation ............................358
䡵 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS
ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED ...................360
▫ Description ...........................360
▫ Air Suspension Modes ...................362
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages .........363
▫ Operation ............................364
䡵 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (2500/3500 MODELS) —
IF EQUIPPED ...........................365
▫ Description ...........................365
▫ Air Suspension Modes ...................367
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages .........368
▫ Operation ............................368
䡵 AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)..............368
䡵 STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY .........................370
䡵 SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
ONLY ................................372
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
Characteristics ........................372
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand............374
▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points) ..............................375
▫ Hill
Climbing..........................377
▫ Driving Through Water...................379
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Airing Down For Off-Road Driving ..........381
▫ Vehicle Recovery .......................382
▫ After Driving Off-Road...................385
䡵 LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL ..............386
䡵 WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY
(IF EQUIPPED) .........................386
▫ Things To Know Before Using Your Winch .....386
▫ Understanding The Features Of Your Winch . . . .388
▫ Winch Accessories ......................389
▫ Operating Your Winch ...................390
▫ Rigging Techniques .....................401
䡵 POWER STEERING.......................402
▫ Electric Power Steering — 1500 Models .......402
▫ Hydraulic Power Steering —
2500/3500 Models ......................403
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED ....................404
䡵 SPEED CONTROL .......................404
▫ To Activate ...........................405
▫ To Set A Desired Speed...................405
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................406
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................407
▫ To Resume Speed ......................407
▫ To Deactivate .........................407
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................408
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................408
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................408
▫ ParkSense Display ......................409
▫ Enabling
And Disabling ParkSense ..........412
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .412
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............413
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........413
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ..................415
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................415
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................416
▫ ParkSense Display ......................416
▫ Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
ParkSense ............................418
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System .....418
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............419
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........419
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ............................421
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE . . .424
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............425
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................425
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ........425
▫ Payload..............................425
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ..........426
▫ Tire Size .............................426
▫ Rim Size .............................426
▫ Inflation Pressure .......................426
▫ Curb Weight ..........................426
▫ Loading .............................426
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................427
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............427
▫ Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
Weight ..............................433
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) .............................434
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...............434
▫ Towing Requirements ...................435
▫ Towing Tips ..........................442
䡵 SNOWPLOW ...........................444
▫ 1500
Models Only ......................444
▫ 2500/3500 Models Only ..................444
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................447
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .447
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models ..............................448
▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models ..............................448
䡵 DRIVING TIPS ..........................453
▫ Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..............453
▫ Driving Through Water ..................453
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips ...................454
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more than 10-second
intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such intervals
will protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK position.
Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range.
NOTE:
• This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift inter-
locking system. The brake pedal must be pressed to shift
out of PARK.
• If equipped with an 8-speed transmission, starting the
vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible unless the Manual
Park Release has been activated. For the Manual Park
Release operation refer to Manual Park Release in “In
Case Of Emergency”.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter
motor will continue to run and will automatically disen-
gage when the engine is running.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the passenger
compartment.
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 MPH
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
will remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector is in
PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed above 5 MPH (8 km/h), the instrument cluster
will display a “ Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed below 5 MPH (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and
the ignition will remain in the ACC position. If vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may
AutoPark. See AutoPark section for further details.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driv-
er’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN.
To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF mode.
AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and 8-Speed Trans Only
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the
vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied
upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid
(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the Instrument
Cluster Display and near the gear selector. If the ⴖPⴖ
indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not de-
signed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into
PARK. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed
transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE: For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will
turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC mode.
After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automati-
cally, unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may Au-
toPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed
transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Brake Pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift
to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
NOTE: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the “ Au-
toPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” to not be
seen. In these cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to
select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
P”will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the ve-
hicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km). A vehicle
left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4WD LOW.
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when all of
these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Driver’s Door is ajar
• Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Not Engaged” will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will
continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the
Driver’s Door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the ⬙P⬙ in the Instrument Cluster
Display and near the shifter. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Idle Shutdown — 6.4L Engine Only
This feature can be enabled so that the truck will automati-
cally shutdown when the truck has been idling for a set
period of time when the engine is at operating tempera-
ture. Idle time can be set in 5 minute increments between 5
and 60 minutes. See your local authorized dealer to enable
this feature.
NOTE: The idle shut down timer is disabled while the PTO
is active.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while the engine is cranking. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the
accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the ignition
button/key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking
with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor.
Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key
once the engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10 second
period of engine cranking with the accelerator pedal held
to the floor, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
1500 Models
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp
assembly. It is located between the front grill and the
radiator, but underneath the black upper seal.
2500/3500 Models
The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille by
the right front tow hook.
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered
strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not
in use for the winter months. During winter months,
remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the
c-clip.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in period.
Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the trans-
mission in PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels
toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the
gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always be
applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended
children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Parking Brake Release
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, (or, with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode)
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition to warn you that this safety feature
is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to
the ON/RUN mode (engine running, for vehicles with
eight-speed transmission) and the brake pedal must be
pressed.
In 8-speed vehicles, the brake pedal must also be pressed to
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the instrument panel. The trans-
mission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the
gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear
range, simply rotate the gear selector. You must press the
brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is re-
turned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual downshifts can
be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control. Pressing the GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the
steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will display that
gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to
“Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation” in this section
for further information. Some models will display both the
selected gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in
ERS mode.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
park brake. Always apply the park brake fully when
exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
WARNING! (Continued)
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the park brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and
remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position (or, with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode),
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the park brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to
⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙ in this section for
further information) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or be-
low), transmission operation may be modified depending
on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmis-
sion temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the engine
may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may
be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired loca-
tion (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. On vehicles with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ignition switch
until the engine turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation —
Eight-Speed Transmission
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the trans-
mission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmis-
sion gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not
shift above fourth gear (except to prevent engine over-
speed), but will shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is in
DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-
ing between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR- switch
(on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as
the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the
GEAR- or GEAR+ switch will change the top available
gear.
1 — GEAR - Switch 2 — GEAR + Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR+
switch until the gear limit display disappears from the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs,
push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.
TOW/HAUL Switch
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in
icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine brak-
ing can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle
to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident possibly result-
ing in personal injury or death.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 1500 Models
Only (If Equipped)
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
The gear selector is mounted either on the right side of the
steering column (if equipped) or on the console (if
equipped). You must press the brake pedal to move the
gear selector out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission
Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the
gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE
position. Pull the gear selector toward you when shifting
into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK
(column shift only).
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a pre-
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts
can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control. Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches (column shift) or
moving the gear selector to the left or right (-/+) (console
shift) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest
available transmission gear, and will display that gear limit
in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to ⬙Electronic
Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙ in this section for further
information. Some models will display both the selected
gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position (or, with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode),
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, pull the column-mounted
gear selector toward you and move it all the way
counterclockwise until it stops. For console-mounted
shifter, firmly move the gear selector all the way forward
and to the left until it stops.
• Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through underdrive first and second gears, direct
third gear and overdrive fourth and fifth gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
all normal operating conditions.
To access all six available gears, you must use the Elec-
tronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, described below.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly
terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a
heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation” in
this section for further information) to select a lower gear
range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will
improve performance and extend transmission life by reduc-
ing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmission
shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due
to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning
Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
NOTE:
Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle
at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep grade, or in
stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In these conditions,
torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat
load on the cooling system. Downshifting the transmission to
the lowest possible gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting
to NEUTRAL (when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to
reduce this excess heat generation.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mum efficiency. Engagement of both the torque converter
clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). During ex-
tremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), opera-
tion may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission tem-
perature has risen to a suitable level.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation —
Six-Speed Transmission (1500 Models Only)
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the trans-
mission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmis-
sion gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not
shift above fourth gear, but will shift through the lower
gears normally.
Use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an addi-
tional underdrive gear which is not normally used during
through-gear accelerations. This additional gear can im-
prove vehicle performance and cooling capability when
towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode, gears 1
though 3 are underdrive gears, and ERS 4 is direct drive.
ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrive gears) are the same as the normal
fourth and fifth gears.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-
ing between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch
(column shift) or tapping the gear selector to the left (-)
(console shift) will activate ERS mode, display the current
gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top
available gear. For example, if you are in DRIVE and are in
third (direct) gear, when you tap the gear selector/switch
one time in the (-) direction, the display will show 4 (ERS
4 is direct gear). Another tap down (-) will shift the
transmission down to ERS 3 (the added underdrive gear).
Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will change the top
available gear.
Column Gear Selector
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
To exit ERS mode, simply hold the gear selector to the right
(+) (console shift) or press and hold the ERS (+) switch
(column shift) until the gear limit display disappears from
the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
gear selector to the left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-)
switch down (column shift). The transmission will shift to
the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
CAUTION!
When using ERS for engine braking while descending
steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the engine.
Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine overspeed.
Console Gear Selector
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically con-
trolled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The transmission
will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following
conditions are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position,
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature,
• The engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an adequate
temperature,
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high,
• The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated, and
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs,
push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode,
transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission
will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the
throttle is closed and/or during steady braking maneu-
vers.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.
TOW/HAUL Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in
icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine brak-
ing can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle
to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident possibly result-
ing in personal injury or death.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear,
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because
top gear is disabled, and the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently
warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to
shift into and out of Overdrive.
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmis-
sion into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid
partially draining from the torque converter into the
transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 2500/3500
Models Only
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
The gear selector is mounted on the right side of the
steering column. You must press the brake pedal to move
the gear selector out of PARK (refer to “Brake/
Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section for
further information). To drive, move the gear selector from
PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. Pull the gear
selector toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK,
or when shifting out of PARK.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a pre-
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts
can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control. Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches (on the gear
selector) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest
available transmission gear, and will display that gear limit
in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to ⬙Electronic
Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙ in this section for further
information. Some models will display both the selected
gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position (or, with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode),
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
(Continued)
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector toward
you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it
stops.
• Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through underdrive first, second, and third gears,
direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and sixth gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics
under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation” in this section for further information) to select
a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear range will improve performance and extend transmis-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmis-
sion shift schedule and expand the range of torque con-
verter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent trans-
mission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning
Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a sig-
nificant additional heat load on the cooling system. Down-
shifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear (when
climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped
in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat
generation.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mum efficiency. Engagement of both the torque converter
clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). During ex-
tremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), opera-
tion may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission tem-
perature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnor-
mal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is
activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in fourth
gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized
dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the trans-
mission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmis-
sion gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not
shift above fourth gear, but will shift through the lower
gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-
ing between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch
will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the
instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available
gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will change the
top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the ERS (+) switch
until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument
cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Electronic Range Select
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply push and hold the
ERS (-) switch. The transmission will shift to the range
from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
CAUTION!
When using ERS for engine braking while descending
steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the engine.
Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine overspeed.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically con-
trolled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The transmission
will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following
conditions are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature.
•
The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature.
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs,
push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode,
transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission
will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the
throttle is closed and/or during steady braking maneu-
vers.
TOW/HAUL Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in
icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine brak-
ing can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle
to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident possibly result-
ing in personal injury or death.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
transmission will not shift to sixth gear, until the trans-
mission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after
1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because sixth gear is
disabled, and engine speed is higher when the torque
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is
normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will
demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into
and out of Overdrive.
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmis-
sion into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid
partially draining from the torque converter into the
transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a manu-
ally shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted trans-
fer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your
transfer case, located in this section for further information.
Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H)
• Neutral (N)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range locks the
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions such as
dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This is accomplished by simply moving the
gear selector to the desired positions once the appropriate
speed and gear requirements are met, refer to “Shifting
Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer Case” in this section
for further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on
dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instru-
ment cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in
four-wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are
locked together. This light will illuminate when the transfer
case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position. There is no
light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions on some models.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at
a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine
and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause
damage to the drivetrain.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to
driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disen-
gages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted Transfer
Case
2H To 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion, shifts can
be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after com-
pleting the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
2H Or 4H To 4L
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental
to the vehicle or occupants.
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case
lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
transfer case NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
• Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission may require shutting the
engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the
shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL, hold your foot on the brake, and turn the
engine OFF. Complete the range shift to the desired
mode.
• Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due
to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth align-
ment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).
• Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while the
transmission is in gear.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instru-
ment cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is
fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Four-Position
Switch) — If Equipped
The electronic shift transfer case is operated by the 4WD
Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on
the instrument panel.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range pro-
vides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces
only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Four-Position/Part Time Transfer Case
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
this section for further information.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disen-
gages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on
the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The
transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recre-
ational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights
will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the
control switch back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements,
refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer case,
located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to
driveline components.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not
to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met. To retry a
shift: return the control switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD To 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you mo-
mentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the
control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch
must be in the ON position with the engine either running
or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch
is in the ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels
are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original position
indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed
and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control switch
to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift,
then the desired position indicator light will flash con-
tinuously while the original position indicator light is
ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to
be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, the shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Five-Position
Switch) — If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends
power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road con-
ditions.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
this section for further information.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or four-
wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can
be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this
mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD
mode.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on
the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The
transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recre-
ational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD, 4LOW,
and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument cluster and
indicate the current and desired transfer case selection.
When you select a different transfer case position, the
indicator lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the
control switch back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements,
refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer case,
located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury or death.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
driveline components.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disen-
gages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met. To retry a
shift: return the control switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
2WD To 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK can
be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage
faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine
either running or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the
ignition switch is in the ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD and 4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK if the front
and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this
situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and
the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this
time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to com-
plete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the 4WD control switch to the
desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt
is in process, the desired position indicator light will
flash continuously while the original position indicator
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to
be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case — Eight Speed
Transmission Only
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
this section for further information.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads).
Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
pushing the desired position on the 4WD control switch.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in
the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by
using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights
will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
position have been met. To retry the selection, push the
current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To
find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙
for your transfer case, located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury or death.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
• You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met.
•
If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position
have been met, the current position indicator light will turn
OFF, the selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift. When the shift is com-
plete, the position indicator light for the selected position
will stop flashing and remain ON.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends
power to the front wheels. The four–wheel drive system
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road con-
ditions.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case — Eight Speed
Transmission Only
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
this section for further information.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) or four-
wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can
be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this
mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD
mode.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
pushing the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in
the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by
using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD, 4LOW,
and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument cluster and
indicate the current and desired transfer case selection.
When you select a different transfer case position, the
indicator lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
position have been met. To retry the selection, push the
current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To
find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙
for your transfer case, located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury or death.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
driveline components.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires
of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any
difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
•
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) posi-
tion disengages both the front and rear drive shaft from
the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met.
•
If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position
have been met, the current position indicator light will turn
OFF, the selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift. When the shift is com-
plete, the position indicator light for the selected position
will stop flashing and remain ON.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (1500 MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED
Description
The air suspension system provides full time load leveling
capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust
vehicle height by the push of a button.
1 — Up Button
2 — Down Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer selectable)
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer selectable)
6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer selectable)
NOTE: The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode
when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph
(100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20
seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately
1 in (26 mm)) – This position should be the primary
position for all off-road driving until Off Road 2 (OR2) is
needed. A smoother and more comfortable ride will
result. To enter OR1, push the “Up” button once from
the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below
35 mph (56 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if the
vehicle speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and
50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the
vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle
will be automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road 1 may
not be available due to vehicle payload, an instrument
cluster message will be displayed when this occurs.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Air Suspension Switch
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately
2 in (51 mm))
– This position is intended for off-roading
use only where maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR2, push the “Up” button twice from the NRH
position or once from the OR1 position while vehicle speed
is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be
automatically lowered to OR1. Off-Road 2 may not be
available due to vehicle payload, an instrument cluster
message will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is in OFFROAD1 or OFFROAD2 setting,
be aware of your surroundings, you may not have the
clearance required for certain areas and vehicle dam-
age may occur.
• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately .6 in
[15 mm]) – This position provides improved aerody-
namics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will auto-
matically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed
remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph
(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will
return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed
remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph
(56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h).
NOTE: Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
vehicle settings in the instrument cluster display when
equipped with Uconnect 3.0, or your Uconnect Radio when
equipped with Uconnect 5.0, 8.4A, or 8.4AN. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
2 in (51 mm)) – This position lowers the vehicle for
easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the
rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the “Down”
button once from the NRH while the vehicle speed is
below 33 mph (53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes
below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to
lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60
seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
the Entry/Exit change will be cancelled. To return to
Normal Height Mode, push the “Up” button once while
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over 15 mph
(24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode may not be available due to
vehicle payload, an instrument cluster message will be
displayed when this occurs. Refer to “Instrument Clus-
ter Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Entry/Exit mode may be achieved using your key
fob for easier entry/loading. Refer to “Keys” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your sur-
roundings, you may not have the clearance required for
certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN
position or the engine running for all user requested
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors, must
be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle
is lowering the change will not be completed until the open
door(s) is closed.
This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which
keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncom-
ing traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle
will move up first and then the front. When lowering the
vehicle, the front will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air
suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a
proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to
be disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done through
the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure vol-
ume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
injury or damage to the system, see your authorized
dealer for service.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Air Suspension Modes
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect
the system in unique situations:
AERO Mode
To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension system has a
feature which will put the vehicle into AERO height
automatically. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system
has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” if equipped with a touch screen
radio for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the
air suspension system has a feature which will put the
vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic
load leveling system. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” or
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” if equipped with a
touch screen radio for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be
enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” if equipped with a touch screen radio for
further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Protection Strategy
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle
will disable load leveling as required (suspension over-
loaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will auto-
matically resume as soon as system operation requirements
are met. See your authorized dealer if system does not
resume.
NOTE: If towing with air suspension refer to “Trailer
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
has been detected.
See your authorized dealer for system service if normal
operation does not resume.
Operation
1 — Up Button
2 — Down Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer selectable)
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer selectable)
6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer selectable)
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the
current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps
will show a position which the system is working to
achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are
Air Suspension Switch
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
flashing, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position
the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if
multiple indicators are flashing, the lowest solid indicator
lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
Pushing the “Up” button once will move the suspension
one position higher from the current position, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, speed below threshold, etc). The “Up” button can
be pushed multiple times, each push will raise the re-
quested level by one position up to a maximum position of
OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current
conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspension
one position lower from the current level, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The
“DOWN” button can be pushed multiple times, each push will
lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum
of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest position allowed based on
current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps
and instrument cluster display messages will operate the
same for automatic changes and user requested changes.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH)/Aero Mode – Indicator
lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
this position.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated
when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. Entry/Exit
mode can be requested up to 33 mph (53 km/h). If
vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will flash and indicator lamp
3 will remain solid until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at
which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off.
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the ve-
hicle.
• Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be
illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the
vehicle.
• Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will
be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS
ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
Description
The air suspension system provides full time load leveling
capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust
vehicle height by the push of a button.
NOTE: The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode
when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph
(100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20
seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving.
• Off-Road (OR) (Raises the vehicle approximately 1 in
(26 mm)) – This position is intended for off-roading use
only where maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR, push the “Up” button once from the NRH
position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
While in OR, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automatically
lowered to NRH. Off-Road may not be available due to
vehicle payload, an instrument cluster display message
will be shown when this occurs. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Air Suspension Switch
1 — Up Button
2 — Down Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
4 — Aero Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
5 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
6 — Off-Road Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is in Off-Road setting, be aware of your
surroundings, you may not have the clearance required
for certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately .6 in
(15 mm)) – This position provides improved aerody-
namics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will auto-
matically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed
remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph
(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will
return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed
remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph
(56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h).
NOTE: Speed thresholds for raising the vehicle only apply
if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled.
• To enter Aero Mode manually push the down button
once from NRH at any vehicle speed. To return to NRH
push the up button once while vehicle speed is less than
56 mph (90 km/h).
NOTE: Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
vehicle settings on your Uconnect Radio when equipped
with UConnect 5.0, 8.4A, or 8.4AN. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
3 in (73 mm)) – This position lowers the vehicle for
easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the
rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the “Down”
button twice from the NRH while the vehicle speed is
below 33 mph (53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes
below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to
lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60
seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
the Entry/Exit change will be cancelled. To return to
Normal Height Mode, push the “Up” button twice while
in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over 15 mph
(24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode may not be available due to
vehicle payload, an instrument cluster display message
will be shown when this occurs. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
CAUTION!
When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your sur-
roundings, you may not have the clearance required for
certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN position
or the engine running for all user requested changes. When
lowering the vehicle all of the doors, must be closed. If a door
is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change
will not be completed until the open door(s) is closed.
This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which
keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncom-
ing traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle
will move up first and then the front. When lowering the
vehicle, the front will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air
suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a
proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to
be disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done through
the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure vol-
ume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
injury or damage to the system, see your authorized
dealer for service.
Air Suspension Modes
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect
the system in unique situations:
AERO Mode
To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension system has a
feature which will put the vehicle into AERO height
automatically. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system
has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” if equipped with a touch screen
radio for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the
air suspension system has a feature which will put the
vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic
load leveling system. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” or
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” if equipped with a
touch screen radio for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be
enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” if equipped with a touch screen radio for
further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Protection Strategy
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle
will disable load leveling as required (suspension overloaded,
battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will automatically
resume as soon as system operation requirements are met. See
your authorized dealer if system does not resume.
NOTE:
If towing with air suspension refer to “Trailer Towing”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
has been detected.
See your authorized dealer for system service if normal
operation does not resume.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
Operation
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the
current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps
will show a position which the system is working to
achieve. When raising or lowering, the flashing indicator
lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
Pushing the “Up” button once will move the suspension
one position higher from the current position, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, speed below threshold, etc). The “Up” button can
be pushed multiple times, each push will raise the re-
quested level by one position up to a maximum position of
OR or the highest position allowed based on current
conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspen-
sion one position lower from the current level, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The
“DOWN” button can be pushed multiple times, each push
will lower the requested level by one position down to a
minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest position
allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed,
etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps
and instrument cluster display messages will operate the
same for automatic changes and user requested changes.
Air Suspension Switch
1 — Up Button
2 — Down Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
4 — Aero Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
5 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
6 — Off-Road Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Off-Road (OR) – Indicator lamps 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5
will be illuminated when the vehicle is in NRH.
• Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated
when the vehicle is in Aero Mode.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated
when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. Entry/Exit
mode can be requested up to 33 mph (53 km/h). If
vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 3 will flash and indicator lamp
4 will remain solid until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at
which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off.
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the ve-
hicle.
• Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be
illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the
vehicle.
• Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5 will
be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle.
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (2500/3500 MODELS) —
IF EQUIPPED
Description
This air suspension system is a rear leveling ride height
system. The main purpose of this system is to maintain the
truck’s rear ride height level. There are two selectable
heights that can be chosen based on your operating condi-
tions.
The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN
position or the engine running with zero vehicle speed for
all user requested changes and load leveling.
Rear Leveling Ride Height Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard position
of the suspension and is meant for normal driving. It will
automatically adjust to maintain the rear ride height as
conditions change.
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) – Lowers the vehicle
approximately 1 in (25 mm) for a level truck, to be used as
required while trailer towing. It will automatically adjust
to maintain the rear ride height as conditions change.
Trailer Decoupling/Unloading - The air suspension sys-
tem will load level (lower/exhaust only) for up to 10
minutes after the vehicle is turned off. This allows for easy
removal of a trailer and/or load from the back of the truck
by maintaining the ride height. After 10 minutes you will
need to turn the ignition to the run position for the air
suspension to maintain ride height. If the air suspension
system is disabled using the settings menu (Tire Jack Mode,
Transport Mode or Alignment Mode) the system will
remain disabled when the vehicle is turned off. Reactivat-
ing the air suspension can be accomplished via the settings
menu or driving the vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h) for Tire
Jack Mode or Alignment Mode and 16 mph (26 km/h) for
Transport Mode.
NOTE:
• Most 3500 models will not lower to Alternate Trailer
Height (ATH) when unloaded.
• Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Ignition OFF Behavior
For a predetermined amount of time after the ignition is off
the air suspension may adjust to maintain a proper appear-
ance.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure vol-
ume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
injury or damage to the system, see your authorized
dealer for service.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Air Suspension Modes
The air suspension system has multiple modes to protect
the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system
has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled. This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” if equipped with a touch screen radio for
further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the
air suspension system has a feature which will put the
vehicle below Normal Ride Height (NRH) and disable the
automatic load leveling system. This mode is intended to
be enabled with engine running. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” if equipped with a touch screen radio
for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be
enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” if equipped with a touch screen radio for
further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Protection Strategy
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle
will disable load leveling as required (suspension over-
loaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will auto-
matically resume as soon as system operation requirements
are met. See your authorized dealer if system does not
resume.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
has been detected.
See your authorized dealer for system service if normal
operation does not resume.
Operation
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) button once
while at Normal Ride Height (NRH), will lower the vehicle
to Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) and will illuminate the
LED.
NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until vehicle
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) has been achieved and the
LED will turn off.
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) again will raise
the vehicle to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until Normal Ride
Height (NRH) has been achieved.
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the ve-
hicle.
• Tire/Jack Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
nated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
• Wheel Alignment Mode – No indicator lamps will be
illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front
and rear differentials. These differentials, when engaged,
mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the
wheels to spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to
maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming
stuck. The locking front and rear differentials should only
be engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road situations
where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with the
ground. It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with
the differentials locked on pavement due to the reduced
ability to turn and speed limitations.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced
roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and
damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles
are locked on hard surfaced roads.
• Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is stuck
and the tires are spinning. You can damage drivetrain
components. Lock the rear axle before attempting
situations or navigating terrain, which could possi-
bly cause the vehicle to become stuck.
The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch.
The switch has three positions:
• AXLE UNLOCK – the front and rear axles are unlocked
• REAR LOCK – the rear axle is locked
• FRONT/REAR LOCK – the front and rear axles are
locked
Under normal driving conditions, the switch should be left
in the AXLE UNLOCK position.
NOTE: Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK
position, the limited slip differential in the rear axle still
provides torque biasing capability for moderate low trac-
tion environments.
During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light
will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command
has been successfully executed, the light will remain on
solid.
To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4LO. Refer to
“Four Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information. Move the axle locker switch
position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). The RR indicator light will remain on when the
rear axle is locked.
Axle Lock Selector
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may be neces-
sary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator light is
flashing after placing the switch in the REAR LOCK or
FRONT/REAR LOCK position, drive the vehicle in a turn
or on loose gravel to expedite the locking action.
WARNING!
Do not use the locked axle position for normal driving.
A locked front axle is intended for off-road driving
only. Locking the front axle during on-road driving
will reduce the steering ability. This could cause a
collision and you may be seriously injured.
To lock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to
FRONT/REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). The indicator light will be solid when the front
axle is locked.
NOTE: The rear axle must be locked before the front axle
will lock.
To unlock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to
REAR LOCK. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light
will go out when the axle is unlocked.
NOTE: The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side
to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while turning the
steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or
driving in REVERSE for a short distance may be required
to release the torque lock and unlock the axles.
To unlock the rear axle; move the axle locker switch to
AXLE UNLOCK. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go
out when the rear axle is unlocked.
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting
stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front sus-
pension travel in off-road situations.
Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an
increased ride height of approximately 1.9 in (48.3 mm) in
the front and 1.5 in (38.1 mm) in the rear. A major
advantage to increasing ride height is the positive effect it
has on approach/departure and break over angles.
This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar
switch located on the instrument panel.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
The switch has two positions; On-Road and Off-Road. The
system is normally in the On-Road mode, indicated by a
solid green light. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in
the On-Road mode during normal driving conditions.
WARNING!
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard
surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h),
you may lose control of the vehicle, which could result
in serious injury or death. The front stabilizer bar
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
enhances vehicle stability and assists in maintaining
control of the vehicle. The system monitors vehicle
speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar
at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a
flashing off road light and solid on road light. Once
vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the
system will attempt to return to the Off-Road mode.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4HI or
4LO as shown in “Four Wheel Drive Operation” and push
the right hand Off Road stabilizer/sway bar button to
obtain the Off-Road position. The amber indicator light
will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully
disconnected.
NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due
to left and right suspension height differences. This condi-
tion is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading.
In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/
reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar must be
aligned. This alignment may require that the vehicle be
driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side.
Sway Bar Disconnect Buttons
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
To return to the On-Road mode; push the left hand On
Road stabilizer/sway bar button.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to On-Road
mode, vehicle stability is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster
than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss of control of the
vehicle, which could result in serious injury or death.
Contact your local service center for assistance.
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
ONLY
Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics
Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities.
These off-road capabilities will allow you to explore those
wilderness trails where few travel, providing a source of
exciting and satisfying recreation. Before you venture out,
you should contact your local governmental agency to
determine the designated off-road vehicle (ORV) trails or
recreation areas. You should always tread lightly and only
use established roads, trails or ORV recreational areas.
The National Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management,
or local Department of Natural Resources are a wealth of
information and usually have maps with marked trails.
Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components of
the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and steering
damper. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with boxed
cross members and fore/aft rails. This additional protec-
tion allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe off-road
situations that would be considered impassable by a nor-
mal truck.
Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
The ramp travel index is the distance, in inches, that you
can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree ramp
without lifting any other wheel off the ground. This
distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the
vehicle and multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle has
an RTI of 510, which means you can articulate one front
wheel 26 inches (66 cm) in the air while the other three
wheels remain in contact with the ground.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Water Fording Characteristics
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle’s ability to cross
a body of still water, where the powertrain and drivetrain
are safe from water ingestion. This vehicle has high water
fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of
water, without stopping, 24 inches (60 cm) deep at a
maximum speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of water
30 inches (76 cm) deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle of 1.3 degrees.
CAUTION!
The door sill height is 25 inches (63.5 cm). Water may
intrude into the interior of the vehicle at greater
depths.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous
use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving). When
climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light
brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from
jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road.
You should be familiar with the terrain and area before
proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions:
hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your
vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your
vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so
always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain
a good driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns
or braking. In most cases there are no road signs, posted
speed limits or signal lights. Therefore you will need to use
your own good judgment on what is safe and what isn’t.
When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for
surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan
your future driving route while remembering what you are
currently driving over.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.
Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road
situation.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other com-
bustible materials. The heat from your vehicle exhaust
system could cause a fire.
When To Use Low Range
When driving off-road, shift into 4LO (Low Range) for
additional traction or to improve handling and control on
slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low
range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power
range. This will allow you to idle over obstacles and down
hills, with improved control and less effort. Also, use 4LO
(Low Range) in rain, ice, snow, mud, sand, to get heavy
loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4HI (High
Range) traction will not do the job.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle’s momentum.
• Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and
traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4LO (Low Range) if
necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to
maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a
stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a ¼
turn quickly back and forth, while still applying throttle.
This will allow the tires to get a fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help
maintain your momentum.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine brak-
ing may cause skidding and loss of control.
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Mud –
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the
tires and is very difficult to get through. You should use
4LO (Low Range) with a gear low enough to maintain your
momentum without shifting. If you start to slow to a stop,
try turning your steering wheel no more than a ¼ turn
quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud holes
pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting
stuck. They are normally full of debris from previous
vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before entering
any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there
are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely
recovered if stuck.
• Sand –
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full
tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail
maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The
key to driving in soft sand using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers
and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are going
to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce
your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow
for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will
drastically improve your traction and handling, while driv-
ing on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal
air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard
surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires back up
prior to reducing the pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)
While driving off road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types
of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path ahead to
determine the correct approach and your ability to safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a
firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it
makes contact with the object. Apply the throttle lightly
while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle
up and over the object.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of your
vehicle.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or
determine the correct path. Determining the correct path
can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many
obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you over,
through, or around the obstacle. Have the person stand a
safe distance in front of you where they can see the
obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and guide
you through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which en-
sures you drive over the largest with your tires. This will
lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the
tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is
designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make
every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
CAUTION!
• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough
to strike your axles or undercarriage.
• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut,
the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle’s
mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let
each tire go through the obstacle independently. You need to
use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides. Do
not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an
angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If
you get caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left
at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You
should now be able to drive out following the trench you just
created at a 45-degree angle.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an
obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately
10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top of
the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While
climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then
ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high centered.
Getting High Centered
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out of
the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung
up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the
best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what
you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few
rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point
when you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the
vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects in-
creases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-
standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep to
climb and should not be attempted. You should always feel
confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You should
always climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to
climb a hill on an angle.
• Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a hill
consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is too
steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill side
trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on top
and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or
other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the
vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks
good and you feel confident, then change transmission
into a lower gear, shift the transfer case into 4LO (Low)
and proceed with caution. You should use first gear and
4LO (Low Range) for very steep hills.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
• Driving Up Hill –
Once you have determined your ability
to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line
your vehicle up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate
with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you
start up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade, the
abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If
the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly
to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you approach
the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed
over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway
by turning the steering wheel no more than a ¼ turn quickly
back and forth. This will provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the
surface and will usually provide enough traction to com-
plete the climb. If you do not make it to the top, place the
vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade
using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around
on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases
the risk of a roll over, which may result in severe injury
or death.
• Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hill
you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent.
What is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to
maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there obstacles?
Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at the
base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends
too fast? If you feel confident in your ability to proceed
then make sure you are in 4LO (Low Range) with the
transmission in first gear (manually select first gear on
automatic transmissions) and proceed with caution.
Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply
your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the tires to
lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid
driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your
vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an incline places more
weight on the down hill wheels, which increases the
possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover. Make sure
the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils.
If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading
slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a roll-
over, which may result in severe injury.
• If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall or
begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow
your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply
the brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE.
Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression
braking of the engine and transmission to help regulate
your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle
speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding
the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and
rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe injury.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in RE-
VERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using
only the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally across
a hill, always drive straight up or down.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be
attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible manner.
You should only drive through areas which are designated
and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage
to the environment. You should know your vehicle’s
abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong.
You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing
deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air
intake. If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to any
crossing is low and slow. You want to use first gear in 4L
(Low Range) and proceed very slowly with a constant slow
speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h] maximum) and light throttle.
Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through
the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the
bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of
the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other ve-
hicle components and your brakes will be less effec-
tive once wet and/or muddy.
• Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you ap-
proach any type of water you need to determine if you
can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out
and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and
bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters,
check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be
intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the
vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the
water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft
bottoms the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing
the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this
when determining the depth and the ability to safely
cross.
• Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other
standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy
waters. These water types normally contain hidden
obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate
water depth, approach angle, and bottom condition.
Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to
hook up tow straps prior to entering. This makes for a
faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you are able
to determine you can safely cross, than proceed using
the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effective-
ness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely dan-
gerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or
river even in shallow water. Fast moving water can
easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of
control. Even in very shallow water, a high current can
still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting
you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high
risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower
water currents in depths greater than the vehicle’s
running ground clearance. You should never attempt to
cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle’s
running ground clearance. Even the slowest current can
push the heaviest vehicle downstream out of control if
the water is deep enough to push on the large surface
area of the vehicle’s body. Before you proceed determine
the speed of the current, the water’s depth, approach
angle, bottom condition and if there are any obstacles,
then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using
the low and slow technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at risk
of injury or drowning.
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving
Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your
ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air
pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its
surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or form
to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and vehicles
require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like rock and
heavier vehicles require higher pressures than softer sur-
faces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will need to
experiment to determine what is right for your situation. It
is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it so,
start high and lower it as required. Remember you must
return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on
road or at highway conditions. Be sure you have a way to
return the tires to their normal on road air pressure.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire damage
and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air
pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at
a reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Vehicle Recovery
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation where
you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle recovery
should always be given consideration before attempting a
questionable obstacle. You should never go off-road driv-
ing without the ability to recover your vehicle from a
situation. Having another vehicle with you usually works
best for most situations. The first thing to do is assess the
situation. Why are you stuck? Are you hung up on
something? Would it be easier to go forward or to go
backward? Can you still move the vehicle? Is there an
anchor point to winch to? Are you alone or do you have
another vehicle to help? Is there high risk of vehicle
damage during the recovery process? Answering these
questions will help you determine the best method of
recovery. If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the
only issue is slick ground, then rock cycling your vehicle
would be the first choice. If you have ample room, an
additional vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impinge-
ment on the surroundings, then using a tow strap to the
vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy. If the vehicle is
severely hung up or in a situation where great care needs
to be taken during the recovery, then nothing can do the job
better than a winch. If you are severely hung up on
something you should jack the vehicle up and stack
something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off
the object without causing further damage. This should be
tried before attempting any recovery method.
CAUTION!
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first clear-
ing the object, may result in additional underbody
damage.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your vehicle
is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly used
methods. This simply involves shifting your vehicle
from DRIVE to REVERSE, while applying throttle after
each shift. During this process, for additional traction,
try turning your steering wheel quickly left and right no
more than a ¼ turn. If you are stuck in mud, sand, or
snow try spinning your tires during this process to clean
the debris from the tread and improve the traction. You
want to create a rocking motion with the vehicle. This
helps build vehicle momentum, which hopefully gets
you out. Remember to ease off and on the accelerator
before and after the shift. If after a few rock cycles your
vehicle is not free, stop and try another method of
recovery. Continuous rock cycling will only cause un-
necessary damage to your vehicle and the environment.
CAUTION!
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an
excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster than
an indicated 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow straps
are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from
minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which
is not stuck. The tow hooks on your vehicle are designed
to take the abusive force generated during vehicle
recovery. Do not use the bumper or any other vehicle
component as an attachment point. Using tow straps
requires coordination between the two drivers. Good
communication and line of sight are required for a safe
recovery. First connect the tow strap to the correct
attachment points on both vehicles. There should be a
least 20 to 30 feet (6 to 9 meters) between the vehicles to
allow for a safe recovery. If necessary join two tow straps
together usinga1½inch hard wood dowel. This will
keep the straps from becoming knotted and is safer than
using a clevis pin if the strap breaks. Next have the tow
vehicle backup, leaving two to three feet worth of slack
in the strap. Then the tow vehicle, using light throttle,
should accelerate tightening the strap providing the
pulling force needed to free the vehicle. The vehicle
being recovered should assist in the recovery, at the time
of the snap, by slowly spinning the tires in the same
direction as the pulling vehicle. After the vehicle be-
comes free, the driver of the previously stuck vehicle
should signal they are free and should hit their brakes
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
stopping both vehicles. The driver of the pulling vehicle
should let off the throttle without using the brakes, once
signaled by the other driver. This sequence is important
to avoid having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling
vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two straps
with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects could
become projectiles if a strap breaks, which could cause
severe injury. Never leave more than 2 to 3 feet (.6 to
1 meter) of slack in the strap. More slack than this
greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle damage.
Always keep everyone at least 30 feet (9 meters) away
from a strapping or winching situation.
• Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” For Additional
Information) – Winching is most commonly used in the
following situations: there is no support vehicle avail-
able, a high controlled force is required to recover the
vehicle, there is a high risk of environmental or vehicle
damage, or where nothing else seems to work. A winch
can deliver a high pulling force with a great deal of
control. It allows you to walk the vehicle out of the
situation in a slow controlled manner. This control
works well for avoiding further vehicle damage. Once
you decide it is time to use the winch look for a good
anchor point. It needs to be strong enough to hold more
than the vehicle’s weight and provide a direction of pull
as straight as possible. Use block and tackle if necessary
to improve the angle of pull or increase the winch’s
pulling force. If the anchor point is a tree use a strap
around its base and hook the cable to the strap. If it is
another vehicle, then place that vehicle in PARK and
block the front tires. If you cannot find an anchor point
within reach try using your spare tire by burying it.
Once you have determined an anchor point hook up the
cable, ensuring there are a least five wraps of cable left
on the drum, and place a floor mat or something else
over the strung out cable. Placing something over the
strung out cable helps keep the cable on the ground if it
breaks. Next, place the vehicle in first gear and apply a
very light throttle as you power the winch in. Be careful
not to allow slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle.
Do not try to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts to
bunch up on one end, let it. You can re-spool the cable
afterwards. Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and
always stand back while winching.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Winch cables are under high tension when in use and
can become a projectile if they fail. Never stand over or
straddle the winch cable. Never jerk or overload the
winch cable. Never stand in front of the vehicle while
winching. Failure to follow these instructions can
result in serious or fatal injury.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does
most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a good
idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when
you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction on
snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when there is
a difference between the traction characteristics of the
surface under the right and left rear wheels. During normal
driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs simi-
larly to a conventional differential. On slippery surfaces,
however, the differential delivers more of the driving effort
to the rear wheel having the better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will
supply maximum traction. When starting with only one
rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight mo-
mentary application of the parking brake may be necessary
to gain maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose control
of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could cause
both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide
sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.
WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY
(IF EQUIPPED)
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch
General Winch Information
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery
winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the
vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds wire
rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduction. By
nature, a winch is capable of generating very high forces
and should be used with care. Do not operate the winch
without reading and understanding the complete winch
owner’s manual.
Tensioning The Wire Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Follow the instructions below to tension the rope:
1. Un-spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on the
winch drum.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
CAUTION!
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load required
to tension the wire rope.
3. Apply at least 500 lbs (227 kg) of tension to the rope
while winding the rope. Always use care to ensure the
rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is
neatly wound onto the drum.
CAUTION!
Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the
direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the
winch.
Low Voltage Interrupt
Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt
winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage
drops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out for
30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is
tripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a
few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to
recover before continuing to winch.
Winch Motor Thermal Protection
Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device in
the motor. If the winch is operated for an excessive
duration, the device may interrupt motor function to
protect the winch motor. During this time the winch will
power-out but will not power-in. Allow the winch motor to
cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch. The
winch will resume normal function once the motor cools.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
Understanding The Features Of Your Winch
1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle
charging system and features a thermal protection
switch that automatically stops motor function in the
power-in direction if the motor gets too hot.
2. Remote Socket: The remote socket allows the remote
control to be attached to the control pack to allow the
winch to function.
Winch Components
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch drum
allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and
transmits force to the wire rope. The winch is equipped
with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the
winch drum if the winch motor is stopped.
4. 3-Stage Planetary Gear Set: Provides balance between
speed and pulling power.
5. Wire Rope: The wire rope allows the winch to be
connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force.
6. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum to
be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the wire
rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.
7. Remote Control: The remote control provides the inter-
face between the winch operator and the winch. The
remote control provides the ability to power the winch
in, out, and stop the winch. To operate the winch, the
toggle switch is pressed down to power the winch in
and up to power the winch out. The winch will stop if
the switch is left in the neutral (center) position.
CAUTION!
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the
hook.
Fairlead: The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope and
minimizes damage to the rope.
Winch Accessories
The following accessories are necessary to attach the winch
to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe winching.
Gloves: Wire rope, through use, will
develop ⬙barbs⬙ which can slice skin. It
is extremely important to wear protec-
tive gloves while operating the winch or
handling the wire rope. Avoid loose
fitting clothes or anything that could
become entangled in the wire rope and
other moving parts.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used properly, the
multi-purpose snatch block allows you
to (1) increase the winch’s pulling
power; and (2) change your pulling di-
rection without damaging the wire rope.
Proper use of the snatch block is covered
in ⬙Before You Pull.⬙
Clevis/D-Shackles: The D-Shackle is a
safe means of connecting the looped
ends of cables, straps and snatch blocks.
The shackle’s pin is threaded to allow
easy removal.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typically made of
tough, high-quality nylon, it provides
the operator an attachment point for the
winch rope to a wide variety of anchor
points and objects, as well as protect
living trees.
Operating Your Winch
WARNING!
Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding
proper winch usage may result in severe injury.
• Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook
when spooling wire rope in or out.
• Never use as a hoist.
• Never use to move persons.
• Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity.
• Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling
the wire rope.
• Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or
under load.
• Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under
load, wire rope is in tension, or wire rope drum is
moving.
• Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep
others away during winching.
• Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire
rope, hook and fairlead opening during operation
and when spooling.
(Continued)
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never wrap wire rope back onto itself. Always use a
choker chain, wire choker rope or tree trunk protec-
tor on the anchor.
• Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to
increase the length of a pull.
• Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery
strap attached directly to the winch hook.
• Never use ⴖbungeeⴖ straps that develop tremendous
and potentially dangerous amounts of force when
stretched.
• Always disconnect the remote control when not in
use.
• Never winch when there are less than five wraps of
wire rope around the winch drum.
• Always pass remote control through a window to
avoid pinching lead in door, when using remote
inside a vehicle.
• Never leave the remote control plugged into the
winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.
General Information
Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key
points to remember when using your winch are:
• Always take your time to assess the situation and plan
your pull carefully.
• Always take your time when using a winch.
• Use the right equipment for the situation.
• Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire
rope to slip through your hands when handling the
rope.
• Only the operator should handle the wire rope and
remote control.
• Think safety at all times.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch
CAUTION!
• Always Know Your Winch: Take the time to fully
read and understand the included Installation and
Operations Guide, and Basic Guide to Winching
Techniques, in order to understand your winch and
the winching operation.
• Always inspect winch installation and wire rope
condition before operating the winch. Frayed,
kinked or damaged wire rope must be replaced
immediately. Loose or damaged winch installation
must be corrected immediately.
• Always be sure any element which can interfere with
safe winching operations is removed prior to initiat-
ing winching.
• Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum,
wire rope and rigging.
• Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed wires, or loose
connections. Replace if damaged.
• Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar
through the rollers. Watch and listen to Winch for
proper snugness.
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and wire rope for
damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or
rope shows excessive wear or damage.
2. Put on gloves.
Winch Rope
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the winch
drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to disengage.
Freespooling conserves battery power.
4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Free the
winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook strap
to the hook (if not attached).
Free Spool Hook Strap
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
5. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out enough wire
rope to reach your anchor point. Be sure to keep a
certain amount of tension on the wire as it can become
twisted and over-wrapped when slackened, leading to
wire rope damage. To prevent losing the end, hold the
hook strap while you work.
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have established
your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector or
choker-chain around the object.
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will withstand
the load.
Pulling Wire Rope
Tree Trunk Protector
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchor
is critical to winching operations. An anchor must be
strong enough to hold while winching. Natural anchors
include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as low as
possible. If no natural anchors are available when recover-
ing another vehicle, your vehicle becomes the anchor point.
In this case, be sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL,
apply the hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your
vehicle from moving. Ideally, you’ll want an anchor point
that will enable you to pull straight in the direction the
vehicle will move. This allows the wire rope to wind tightly
and evenly onto the spooling drum. An anchor point as far
away as possible will provide the winch with its greatest
pulling power.
7. Attach the Clevis/D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector.
Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain
and through the hook loop, being careful not to over
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the
clutch lever on the winch to engage.
NOTE: Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or
disengaged.
Clevis/D-Shackles
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box,
located behind the front bumper. Be careful not to let the
remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If you
choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle,
always pass the remote through a window to avoid
pinching the cord in the door. Always disconnect the
remote control when not in use.
10. Put wire rope under tension. Using the remote control
switch, slowly wind the wire rope until no slack
remains. Once the wire rope is under tension, stand
well clear of it and never step over it.
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are
secured and free of debris before continuing with the
winching procedure.
Winch Box Remote Control Connector
Pulling Wire Rope Under Tension
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
12. Check wire rope. The wire rope should be neatly
wound around the spooling drum. Improper winding
can cause damage to the wire rope.
In certain situations you may decide to throw a heavy
blanket or similar object over the wire rope. A heavy
blanket can absorb energy should the wire rope break.
Place it on the wire rope midway between the winch and
the anchor point. Do this before the wire rope is put under
tension. Do not approach or move the blanket once tension
is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead. If
it is necessary to move or remove the blanket, slack the
tension on the wire rope first.
Wire Neatly Wound Around The Spooling Drum
Heavy Blanket Over Wire Rope
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
13. Establish ⴖno peopleⴖ zones: Make your intentions
clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity
surrounding the winching operation is completely
aware of your intentions before you pull. Declare
where the spectators should not stand - never behind
or in front of the vehicle and never near the wire rope
or snatch block. Your situation may have other ⴖno
peopleⴖ zones.
14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine on
and light tension already on the wire rope, begin
winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the wire
rope is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling
drum. For additional assistance, the winched vehicle
can be slowly driven while being pulled by the winch.
Continue pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground.
If you are able to drive the vehicle, the winching
operation is complete.
No People Zones
Using The Remote Control
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended
winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow the
winch motor to cool down.
• What to look for under load: The wire rope must
always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum
rotation decal on the winch. As you power-in, make
sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the
drum. This prevents the outer wire wraps from draw-
ing into the inner wraps, binding and damaging the
wire rope. Avoid shock loads by using the control
switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack. Shock
loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire
rope ratings. During side pulls the wire rope tends to
stack up at one end of the drum. This stack can become
large enough to cause serious damage to the winch. So,
line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop
winching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods or
mounting plate. To fix an uneven stack, spool out that
section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite end
of the drum, which will free up space for continued
winching.
15. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is com-
plete, be sure to secure the vehicle’s brakes and shift
the transmission to PARK. Release tension in the wire
rope.
16. Disconnect the wire rope, and disconnect from the
anchor.
17. Rewind the wire rope. The person handling the wire
rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide
through the hand, control the winch at all times.
Rewinding The Wire Rope
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
inside the hook area as you are powering-in.
NOTE: How to spool under no load: Arrange the remote
control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch. Arrange
the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled. Be
sure any wire rope already on the spooling drum is wound
tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and straighten the layer
if necessary. Keep the wire rope under light tension and
spool the wire rope back and onto the winch drum in even
layers. Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the layers
as necessary. Repeat this process until the winch hook is the
same distance as the full length of the remote control from
the winch. Pinch the hook between your thumb and
forefinger and attach the hook strap. Hold the hook strap
between the thumb and forefinger to keep tension on the
wire rope. Walk the wire rope towards the fairlead, care-
fully spooling in the remaining wire rope. By pulsing the
remote control switch.
18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow
hook.
19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the remote
control cord from the control box and store in a clean
and dry place. Winching operations are now complete.
Put the cap on the solenoid plug-in.
NOTE: Always store the remote control in a protected,
clean, dry area.
Hook In Stored Position
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rigging Techniques
Various winching situations will require application of other
winching techniques. These could range from too little dis-
tance to achieve maximum pull using straight line rigging,
simply increasing pulling power, or maintaining a straight-
line pulling situation. You will have to assess what technique
is correct for your situation. Think ⬙safety⬙ at all times.
How To Change The Pulling Direction
All winching operations should have a straight line from
the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the
wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting
pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope. A snatch block,
secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle will enable
you to change your pulling direction while still allowing
the wire rope to be at 90° to wind properly onto the
spooling drum.
Increasing Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more pulling
power. The use of snatch blocks increases mechanical
advantage and that increases your pulling power.
Change Pulling Directions
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
Double Line
Because pulling power decreases with the number of layers
of wire rope on the winch drum, you can use a snatch block
to double line out more wire rope. This decreases the
number of layers of wire rope on the drum, and increases
pulling power. Start by feeding out enough wire rope to
free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your vehicle’s
frame/tow hook and run the wire rope through a snatch
block. Disengage the clutch and, using the snatch block,
pull out enough wire to reach your anchor point. Do not
attach the hook to the mounting kit. Secure to the anchor
point with a tree trunk protector or choker chain. Attach
the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the two ends of
the strap/chain, being careful not to over tighten (tighten
and back-off 1/2 turn).
POWER STEERING
Electric Power Steering — 1500 Models
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
the vehicle manually.
If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the
vehicle has lost power steering assistance.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER-
ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme steer-
ing maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over
temperature condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle
idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off.
Wire Rope Routing
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER
STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is displayed the in-
strument cluster screen, they indicate the vehicle needs to
be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
Hydraulic Power Steering — 2500/3500 Models
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in
any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
Power Steering Fluid Check — 2500/3500 Models
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked
if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent,
and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Check
fluid level when the engine is cold and off. Coordinate
inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steer-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
speed control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the
system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET (-)
2 — RES (+) 4 — CANCEL
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button, or returning the ignition to
OFF, erases the set speed from memory.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operat-
ing speed, a warning will appear within the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected.
NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn on indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the left and/or right rear
region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a
single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
Slow Tone Fast Tone
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-45 inches
(200-115 cm)
45-31 inches
(115-80 cm)
31-18 inches
(80-45 cm)
Less than
18 inches (45 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Arc None 4th Solid 3rd
Solid
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Continuous Tone
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The rear chime volume settings are programmable.
• The settings may be programmed through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for ap-
proximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instru-
ment cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will automatically disable
when the system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes has
been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake Module. The
instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be off
when the system is enabled.
If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system is
disabled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru-
ment cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will show the ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or the ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
show the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS⬙ or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in RE-
VERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
tion, and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues
to appear, see your authorized dealer.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
appears in the instrument cluster display, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will show ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙. Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show the ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 18
inches (45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while driv-
ing the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem,
causing the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED⬙ message to appear in the instrument cluster
display.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should
be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open
position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A lowered
tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or
front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to
“ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in this section for
limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display indicating the vehicle is above
ParkSense operating speed. The system will become active
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
of the obstacle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected.
NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
ParkSense Display
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or
right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows
one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The follow-
ing chart shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-45 inches
(200-115 cm)
45-31 inches
(115-80 cm)
31-18 inches
(80-45 cm)
Less than
18 inches
(45 cm)
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
None Single 1/2
Second Tone (for
rear only)
Slow (for rear
only)
Fast Continuous
Arcs None 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake
pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are program-
mable.
• The settings may be programmed through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
ParkSense
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
Front ParkSense switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Rear
ParkSense switch.
When the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is
pushed to disable the system, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
Front or Rear system is disabled, the instrument cluster
display will show the ⬙FRONT PARKSENSE OFF⬙ or
⬙REAR PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for five seconds, fol-
lowed by a vehicle graphic with ⬙OFF⬙ in the correspond-
ing side. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE: Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system, will
interrupt the five second messages, and the instrument
cluster display will show the vehicle graphic with the
corresponding arcs and ⬙OFF⬙ message.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on when
Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
Front or Rear system is enabled. If the Front or Rear
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires
service, the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS⬙,orthe⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙UN-
AVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location
depending on where the fault is detected. The system will
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is function-
ing properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙,
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
messages if an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain dis-
played for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see your
authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the instrument cluster dis-
play, see your authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, the instru-
ment cluster display will read “FRONT PARKSENSE
OFF” or “REAR PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, it remains off until
you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off, the
instrument cluster display will show the ⬙FRONT
PARKSENSE OFF⬙ or ⬙REAR PARKSENSE OFF⬙ mes-
sage for five seconds, followed by a vehicle graphic with
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
⬙OFF⬙ in the corresponding side. This vehicle graphic
will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
etc. are placed within 18 inches (45 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be appear in the instrument
cluster display.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should
be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open
position. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indi-
cation that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see a image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is
put into REVERSE or whenever it is initiated through the
⬙Backup Camera⬙ button in the ⬙Controls⬙ menu. Whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE, the image will be
displayed in the rearview mirror display (if equipped) or
Uconnect screen (if equipped) along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView Camera is located to the left of the tailgate
handle.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
delay turned off), the rear Camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
delay turned on), the rear Camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless
the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is
switched to the OFF position.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button in the ⬙Controls⬙
menu, a display timer for the image is initiated. The image
will continue to be displayed until the display timer
exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is above 8 mph
(13 km/h) or the touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display
of the Rear View Camera image is pressed.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
NOTE: If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be displayed
continuously until deactivated via the touchscreen button
⬙X⬙.
If Equipped — Cargo Camera Icons:
•
— Backup Camera Touchscreen Button
•
— Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button
to indicate the current active Camera image being
displayed is made available whenever the Rear View
Camera image is displayed.
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button
to switch the display to Cargo Camera image is made
available whenever the Rear View Camera image is
displayed.
A touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in RE-
VERSE gear.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. The
active guide lines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: For further information about how to access and
change the programmable features of the ParkView Rear
Backup Camera, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zones Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
greater)
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to
view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning Rear View Camera Image On:
1. Press the ⬙Controls⬙ button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
2. Press the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button
to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
NOTE: Once initiated by the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button, the
Rear View Camera image may be deactivated by pressing
the ⬙X⬙ button on the touchscreen. On deactivation, the
previous selected screen will appear.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel filler
door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel door and
remove the fuel cap by turning it counter-clockwise.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Cap
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on
if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
Static electricity can cause an ignition of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce
risk of serious injury or death when filling containers:
• Always place container on the ground before filling.
• Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container
when you are filling it.
• Use only approved containers for flammable liquid.
• Do not leave container unattended while filling.
• A static electric charge could cause a spark and fire
hazard.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed,
or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will dis-
play in the instrument cluster telltale display
area. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the RIGHT
button to turn off the message. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) or more,
it is recommended to use a weight-distributing hitch to
ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a
standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control
of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly.
Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control, thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with GAWR require-
ments.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
performance and could result in a collision.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
Towing With 1500 Air Suspension
1. Set air suspension to normal ride height. No action is
required if already in normal ride height.
NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine run position
with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for proper
leveling of the air suspension system.
2. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer
(do not connect the trailer).
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Under the instrument cluster or touch screen radio
settings, enable jack mode. Jack mode will be canceled
and procedure must be restarted if the vehicle is driven
at speeds above 5mph (8 kmh).
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H1.
5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
6. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H2.
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing
bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that
the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
3+H1 (about 1/3 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
8. Use the instrument cluster or touch screen radio settings
and switch off tire jack mode. Make sure the truck
returns to normal ride height. Preform a visual inspec-
tion of the trailer and weight distributing hitch to
confirm manufacturers’ recommendations have been
met.
9. The truck can now be driven.
Measurement Example
Example 1500 Height
(mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/3 7
(H2-H1)/3 + H1 932
NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with tow haul mode engaged.
Measuring Height (H)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Towing With 2500/3500 Air Suspension
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer
(do not connect the trailer).
NOTE: Normal Ride Height (NRH) or Alternate Trailer
Height (ATH) can be used. The vehicle must remain in the
engine running position while attaching a trailer for proper
leveling of the air suspension system. It may not be
possible to enter Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) while
lightly loaded.
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing
bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that
the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Preform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight
distributing hitch to confirm manufacturers’ recommen-
dations have been met.
Measurement Example
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with tow haul mode engaged.
Towing With All Other 1500/2500/3500 (Non-Air Suspen-
sion)
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer
(do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing
bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that
the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Preform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight
distributing hitch to confirm manufacturers’ recommen-
dations have been met.
Measurement Example
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with tow haul mode engaged.
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a
coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle
in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer
with a coupling king pin.
Your truck may be equipped with a 5th wheel hitch option.
Refer to the separately provided 5th wheel hitch safety,
care, assembly, and operating instructions.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight
a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and
should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer
hitch for your intended towing condition.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max.
Tongue Weight
Class III Bumper
Hitch - 1500 Model
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) / 500 lbs
(226 kg)
Class IV - 1500 Model 11,000 lbs (4,989 kg) /
1100 lbs (498 kg)
Class V - 2500/3500
Models
18,000 lbs (8,164 kg) /
1800 lbs (816 kg)
Fifth Wheel - 2500
Model
25,000 lbs (11,339 kg) /
5000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Gooseneck - 2500
Model
20,000 lbs (9,071 kg) /
4000 lbs (1,814 kg)
Gooseneck Or Fifth
Wheel - 3500 Model
32,000 lbs (14,545 kg) /
6000 lbs (2,721 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not
make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servic-
ing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
inflation procedures.
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement proce-
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capac-
ity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Module
(ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH)
trailer brakes.
NOTE: This module has been designed and verified with
electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic
systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be compat-
ible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the
tow vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control lever is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the
two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding
the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN
setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status Indi-
cator Light” will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control power
output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The GAIN
setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased
to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for
the specific towing condition and should be changed as
towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions
include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally and properly adjusted.
See your trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections
according to the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in,
the trailer connected message should appear in the
instrument cluster display (if the connection is not
recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the
correct type of trailer must be selected from the instru-
ment cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
“TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer Brake
Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN
buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears on
the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn
freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just
below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer,
trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the
maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric over Hydrau-
lic Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydrau-
lic Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs
* The suggested selection depends and may change de-
pending on the customer preferences for braking perfor-
mance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road
state may also affect the selection.
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is determined
in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the
trailer. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
NOTE:
• An aftermarket controller may be available for use with
trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake
systems. To determine the type of brakes on your trailer
and the availability of controllers, check with your
trailer manufacturer or dealer.
• Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause
damage to the electrical system and electronic modules
of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if an aftermar-
ket module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shift-
ing does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode
or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control).
NOTE: Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower
gear range (using the ERS shift control) while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve per-
formance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at low
speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below), holding your vehicle
in first gear (using the ERS shift control) can help to avoid
transmission overheating.
If you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of
continuous operation, then change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and filter(s) as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.⬙ Refer to the “Maintenance Plan”
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level be-
fore towing (6-speed automatic only).
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in hilly
areas, or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control) on more severe grades.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
Highway Driving
• Reduce speed.
• Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
Air Suspension System
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the vehicle,
the air suspension system can be used. Refer to “Air
Suspension System” in “Starting And Operating” for fur-
ther information.
NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine running
position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the
air suspension system.
SNOWPLOW
1500 Models Only
NOTE: Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow
applications.
WARNING!
Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should
not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in
the front end structure. The airbags could deploy
unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision
resulting in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
cause damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described
earlier in this manual.
2500/3500 Models Only
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory in-
stalled option. These packages include components neces-
sary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
recommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow
the recommendations contained within the current Body
Builders Guide. See your authorized dealer, installer or
snowplow manufacturer for this information. There are
unique electrical systems that must be connected to prop-
erly assure operator safety and prevent overloading ve-
hicle systems.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described
earlier in this manual.
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exterior
lamps are not properly installed.
Before Plowing
• Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
level.
• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tightness.
• Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
The cutting edge should be ¼ to ½ in (6 cm to 1.2 cm)
above ground in snow plowing position.
• Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func-
tioning properly.
Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body Builders
Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck should
not exceed two.
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR
should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
options or passengers, etc.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow sys-
tem, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers, op-
tions, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings.
These weights are specified on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label on the driver’s side door opening.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting passen-
gers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifications
at the factory without consideration for the weight of the
plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset if
necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow
season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip-
ment following the recommendations provided by the
specific snowplow manufacturer.
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Attached
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or surface
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The
operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance
and allow adequate passing clearance.
Operating Tips
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
should be maximum operating speed. The operator should be
familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed
and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or
under poor visibility.
General Maintenance
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
plow manufacturer’s instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery ter-
minals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain
damage, the following precautions should be observed.
• Operate with transfer case in 4LO when plowing small
or congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed
15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in 4HI.
• Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4LO
range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended
periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
• Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting the
transmission.
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF
The Ground
Two-Wheel
Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT AL-
LOWED
See Instructions
• Automatic transmission in PARK
• Manual transmission in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL)
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front NOT AL-
LOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE:
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
•
Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in
Transport mode before tying them down (from the body) on
a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Air Suspension – If
Equipped” for more information. If the vehicle cannot be
placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not
run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the
body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault
codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down
tension.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is al-
lowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This
may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic trans-
mission in PARK, manual transmission in gear (not in
NEUTRAL).
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing,
to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may
leak from the transmission, causing damage to inter-
nal parts.
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer
cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recreational
towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted into
PARK for recreational towing. Manual transmissions must
be placed in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational
towing. Refer to the following for the proper transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
(Continued)
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• Before recreational towing, the transfer case must be
in NEUTRAL. To be certain the transfer case is fully
in NEUTRAL, perform the procedure outlined under
“Shifting Into NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission
damage will result, if the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL during towing.
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK,
and manual transmissions must be placed in gear
(not in Neutral) for recreational towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid
will leak from the transfer case, causing damage to
internal parts.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) posi-
tion disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground,
with the engine running. Firmly apply the parking
brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
5. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL:
• With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case
lever into NEUTRAL (N)
• With electronic shift transfer case, push and hold the
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button. Some models
have a small, recessed “N” button (at the center of the
transfer case switches) that must be pushed using a
ballpoint pen or similar object. Other models have a
rectangular NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary trans-
fer case control knob. The NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light will blink while the shift is in progress. The light
will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is completed
and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the
NEUTRAL (N) button.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is
no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in
DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
10. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply the
parking brake. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.
11. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in Neutral). On 8-speed
transmissions the shifter will automatically select
PARK when the engine is turned off.
12. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then cycle the
ignition to the RUN mode and back to the OFF mode.
Remove the key fob from the ignition.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:
• Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met before pushing
the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during
the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
• If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the engine
should be started and left running for a minimum of 60
seconds (with all the doors closed) at least once every 24
hours. This process allows the air suspension to adjust
the vehicle’s ride height to compensate for temperature
effects.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
• With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case
lever to the desired position.
• With electronic shift transfer case with rotary selector
switch, push and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
button until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns
off. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL
(N) button has been released, the transfer case will
shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.
• With electronic shift transfer case with push-button
selector switch, push and hold the switch for the
desired transfer case position, until the NEUTRAL (N)
indicator light turns off and the desired position
indicator light turns on.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL (N),
turning the engine OFF is not required, but may be helpful
to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed automatic transmis-
sion, the engine must remain running, since turning the
engine OFF will shift the transmission to PARK (and the
transmission must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to
shift out of NEUTRAL).
5. Turn the engine OFF. Shift automatic transmission into
PARK. On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will auto-
matically select PARK when the engine is turned off.
6. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on a manual
transmission).
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
10. Release the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal
(and clutch pedal on manual transmissions), and check
that the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:
• Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met before
pushing the button to shift out of NEUTRAL (N), and
must continue to be met until the shift has been com-
pleted. If any of these requirements are not met before
pushing the button or are no longer met during the shift,
the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continu-
ously until all requirements are met or until the button is
released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
WARNING! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Off-Road Driving Tips
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills
or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago-
nally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain, shift
to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator slowly
to avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
get any problems taken care of right away and have your
vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............459
䡵 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .459
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................464
▫ Replacement Bulbs .....................464
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs ..................466
䡵 FUSES ................................473
▫ Power Distribution Center ................473
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........479
▫ Jacking And Tire Changing 1500 Series Trucks . .479
▫ Jacking And Tire Changing 2500 And 3500 Series
Trucks ..............................496
䡵 JUMP STARTING ........................513
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...............513
▫ Jump Starting Procedure ..................515
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............516
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED
TRANSMISSION ........................517
▫ Column Gear Selector — If Equipped.........517
▫ Center Console Gear Selector — If Equipped . . .518
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION ........................519
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............520
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............521
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models .................523
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models .................523
▫ Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped........524
7
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the upper
switch bank just below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and
(Continued)
Assist And SOS Mirror
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 459
WARNING! (Continued)
SiriusXM Guardian features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call system
initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
460 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a SOS op-
erator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi-
tional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
•
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS Call
system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be
able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to
determine if additional help is needed. Once the SOS
operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS
Call system, the operator should be able to speak with
you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt
to remain connected with the SOS operator until the SOS
operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
•
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or
smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or loca-
tion), do not wait for voice contact from an Emergency
Services Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 461
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is de-
tected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
462 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 463
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
464 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Base Quad Headlamp –
Low Beam
H11LL
Base Quad Headlamp –
High Beam
9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp
(Base Quad Headlamp)
3157NA
Premium Bi Halogen Pro-
jector Headlamp - Low
Beam
9005Sl+
Premium Bi Halogen Pro-
jector Headlamp - High
Beam
9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp
(Premium Headlamp)
LED (Serviced at autho-
rized dealer)
Fog Lamp (Horizontal
shape)
9145
Fog Lamp (Vertical shape) 9006
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
921K
Rear Cargo Lamp 921
Bulb Number
LED Center High
Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL)/Cargo Lamp
LED (Serviced at autho-
rized dealer)
Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA
Base Rear Tail/Turn and
Stop Lamp
3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn
and Stop Lamp
LED (Serviced at autho-
rized dealer)
Premium Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker
Lamp
194
Side Marker Lamps (Dual
Rear Wheels)
194
Backup Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp 194
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 465
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam
Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park And
Turn — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the six plastic push-in fasteners that secure the
upper radiator seal to the grille support and both fender
ledges.
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the
upper radiator seal to the radiator.
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment screws.
7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the
access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this
access hole.
8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash
shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to
disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front
lamp unit housing.
Headlamp Assembly Attachment Screw Locations
466 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard
edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disen-
gage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.
10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
bulb socket.
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.
CAUTION!
• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for replace-
ment. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat
and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the
lamp wiring.
NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp bulb
access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if
equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the bulb
has been replaced.
Fog Lamps — If Equipped
1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access the
back of the front fog lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector from
the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise ¼ turn to unlock the
bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
Slide Lock
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 467
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed sheet
metal.
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far enough
to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard side of
the lamp housing from the two plastic snap post retain-
ers in the outer box side panel.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb
socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1/4 turn to
unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
Tail Lamp Screw Locations
Pulling Out The Tail Lamp
468 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to the
body as shown.
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wiring
harness to the body.
3. Turn the desired bulb socket ¼ turn and remove the
socket and bulb from housing.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
CHMSL Connector Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 469
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
• Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.
CHMSL Bulb And Socket
Removing Rear Screw From Clearance Lamp
470 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn and pull it from the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.
Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp
Removing The Bulb From The Bulb Socket
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 471
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access to
the bulb sockets.
2. Turn the socket ¼ turn counterclockwise to access the
bulb.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn the socket ¼ turn counterclockwise and remove
from assembly to access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.
Screw Locations
Side Marker Lamp Locations
472 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the
following chart.
Power Distribution Center Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 473
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 80 Amp Black – Rad Fan Control Module – If Equipped
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan – If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension – If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08 20 Amp Blue (1500 LD/
Cummins Diesel)
– Emissions Diesel – If Equipped
F09 40 Amp Green (Special
Services Vehicle &
Cummins Diesel)
– Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
F10 50 Amp Red – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2 – If Equipped
with Stop/Start
F11 30 Amp Pink – Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4 / Interior Lighting
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart Bar – If Equipped
474 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F19 20 Amp Blue (1500 LD
Diesel)
30 Amp Pink (Cum-
mins Diesel)
– SCR – If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F22 20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink (Cum-
mins Diesel)
– Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink – Body Controller #1 / Interior Lighting
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F26 30 Amp Pink – Antilock Brakes / Stability Control Module / Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle
F31 30 Amp Pink (1500 LD
Diesel)
– Urea Heater Control – If Equipped
F32 – – Spare Fuse
F33 20 Amp Blue – Special Services Vehicle Only
F34 30 Amp Pink – Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If Equipped
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 475
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof – If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster – If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – Cummins Diesel Fuel Heater #2 – If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC – If Equipped
F39 20 Amp Blue – Power Outlet – Special Services Only
F41 – 10 Amp Red Active Grille Shutter – If Equipped
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitter – If Equipped
F49 – 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster (Except Fleet Vehicles)
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module – If Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition (Instrument
Panel Cluster – Fleet Vehicles Only)
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Diesel Content – If Equipped
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Transmission
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare Fuse
F59 – 10 Amp Red SCR Relay – If Equipped
476 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Underhood Lamp
F61 – 10 Amp Red (1500
LD Diesel & Cum-
mins Diesel)
PM Sensor – If Equipped
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Cummins Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
F65 – – Spare Fuse
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches / Rain Sensor
F67 – 10 Amp Red CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module – If
Equipped
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Mod SCR 12V (Cummins Diesel) – If Equipped
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier
F72 – 10 Amp Red PCM – If Equipped
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump (HD Only) – If Equipped
F74 – 20 Amp Yellow (Gas
Engine & 1500 LD
Diesel)
Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel – If Equipped
F75 – 10 Amp Red Coolant Temperature Valve Actuator
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 477
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F76 – 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes / Electronic Stability Control
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect
Module
F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module / Electric Power Steering
F79 – 15 Amp Blue Clearance Lights
F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module / Cruise Control
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank / Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer Tow / Steer-
ing Column Control Module
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear Seats) Customer Selectable
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter / Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Park Assist
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch
478 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F97 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel – If
Equipped
F98 – 25 Amp Clear Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters – If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart High Beams – If
Equipped
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel / Center Console)
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jacking And Tire Changing 1500 Series Trucks
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 479
WARNING! (Continued)
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
system, there is a feature which allows the automatic
leveling to be disabled to assist with changing a tire.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature
can be activated through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be activated through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger
seat.
Removal Of Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
To access the jack and jack tools, you must remove the
plastic access cover located on the side of the front passen-
ger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the
cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release
a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the
cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the
seat frame.
Jack Access Cover
480 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the
assembly out from under the seat.
Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove tools
from bag.
Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
Jack And Tool Bag
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 481
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
CAUTION!
• The lug wrench can only be attached to extension 2.
• When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism be
sure the large flared end opening on extension 4 is
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
positioned correctly over the winch mechanism ad-
justing nut.
• Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and winch
mechanism may occur from improper tool assembly.
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
1 — Lug Wrench 3 — Extension 3
2 — Extension 2 4 — Extension 4
Assembled For Jack Operation
1 — Lug Wrench 4 — Extension 4
2 — Extension 2 5 — Extension With Jack Hook
3 — Extension 3
482 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or
sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects
in the vehicle may move around with force, resulting
in serious injury.
Removing The Spare Tire
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
truck. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with
the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
extension tube through the access hole between the
lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 483
2. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until the
spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to
allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
484 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable.
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
Gaining Access To The Retainer
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 485
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Place the gear selector into PARK. On four-wheel drive
vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
3. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right
front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions (1500 Series)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
(Continued)
486 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the
wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 487
3. Placement of the jack is critical:
NOTE: Keep the jack and tools aligned with raising the
vehicle.
4x2 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location
There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the
lower control arm.
Jack / Extensions Placement 1500
4X2 Front Jacking Location Indicator
488 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack under
the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below.
4x4 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location
There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the
lower control arm.
4X2 Front Jacking Location
4X4 Front Jacking Location Indicator
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 489
When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack under
the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below.
Rear Jacking Location
Operate the jack using the extension with jack hook and the
lug wrench. The extension tubes may be used but is not
required.
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the extension with
jack hook to the jack and connect the extension tubes. Place
the jack under the axle between the wheel and the shock
bracket with the extension with jack hook extending to the
rear.
Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
4X4 Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location
490 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle
until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
5. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off. Install the
spare wheel and lug nuts with the cone shaped end of
the lug nuts toward the wheel. Hand tighten the lug
nuts with vehicle lifted. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the lug nuts until
the vehicle has been lowered.
6. Lower vehicle to ground, finish tightening the lug nuts.
Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star
pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. For the
correct lug nut torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in
“Technical Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
an authorized dealer or service station.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided.
7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center
caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels cannot
be stored under the vehicle because the wheel retainer will
not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Secure the flat tire in
the bed of the truck. Have the flat tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 491
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the
ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for conve-
nience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable and position it
properly across the wheel opening.
3. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the
curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
extension tubes through the access hole between the
lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
Reinstalling The Retainer
Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
And Positioning It
492 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the wheel
is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism
slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be overtight-
ened. Push against the tire several times to ensure it is
firmly in place.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
Lug Wrench And Extension Tubes Assembled And In
Position
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 493
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug wrench
is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding
the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools
under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the
fastener on the floor.
Jack And Tool Bag
Jack And Tools Tied
494 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold down
location.
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan.
Reinstall the plastic cover.
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or
sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects
in the vehicle may move around with force, resulting
in serious injury.
Jack Hold Down Fastener Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 495
Jacking And Tire Changing 2500 And 3500 Series
Trucks
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger
seat.
Removal Of Jack And Tools (2500 And 3500 Series)
To access the jack and jack tools, you must remove the
plastic access cover located on the side of the front passen-
ger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the
cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release
a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the
cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the
seat frame.
Jack Access Cover
496 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the
assembly out from under the seat.
Remove the jack and tools from the bracket assembly. Turn
the jack-turn-screw counterclockwise to release jack from
bracket assembly.
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series) Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 497
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
CAUTION!
• The lug wrench can only be attached to extension 2.
• When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism be
sure the large flared end opening on extension 4 is
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
positioned correctly over the winch mechanism ad-
justing nut.
• Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and winch
mechanism may occur from improper tool assembly.
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
1 — Lug Wrench 3 — Extension 3
2 — Extension 2 4 — Extension 4
Assembled For Jack Operation
1 — Lug Wrench 4 — Extension 4
2 — Extension 2 5 — Jack Driver
3 — Extension 3
498 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or
sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects
in the vehicle may move around with force, resulting
in serious injury.
Removing The Spare Tire
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
truck. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with
the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
extension tube through the access hole between the
lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 499
2. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until the
spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to
allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
500 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel. NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
Gaining Access To The Retainer Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 501
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Place the gear selector into PARK. On four-wheel drive
vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
3. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6.
Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions (2500 And 3500 Series)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
502 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
Jack Warning Label
Lug Wrench Adaptor Shown In Jack And Tools Assembly
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 503
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the
wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground. Changing a
dually tire requires the lug wrench adapter.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with hub caps/wheel
covers they must be removed before raising the vehicle off
the ground. Refer to ”Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If
Equipped” in this section.
Lug Wrench Adapter
Lug Wrench Adapter And Wrench
504 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Placement of the jack is critical: Front Jacking Location
When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack driver to
the jack and connect the jack driver to the extension tubes.
Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible
with the drive tubes extending to the front. Connect the
extension tubes and lug wrench.
Jack / Extensions Placement 2500/3500
Front Jacking Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 505
Rear Jacking Location
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack driver to
the jack and connect the jack driver to the extension tubes.
Place the jack under the axle between the spring and the
shock absorber with the extension tubes extending to the
rear.
Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack
driver in order to lower the jack.
4. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle
until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
Rear Jacking Location
506 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off. On single
rear-wheel (SRW) trucks, install the spare wheel and lug
nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts toward
the wheel. On 3500 dual rear-wheel models (DRW)
trucks, if the outer tire is being replaced then leave the
inner wheel on the vehicle. If the inner wheel is being
replaced remove the outer wheel and replace the inner
wheel. The wheel nuts are a two-piece assembly with a
flat face. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of
forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the
lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the lug
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an autho-
rized dealer or service station.
Rear Inner Wheel Proper Placement (Dual Rear Wheel
Equipped)
Dual Rear Wheel Jack Placement
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 507
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided.
7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center
caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
NOTE: The bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack
driver in order to lower the jack.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
substitute with chrome plated lug nuts.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
NOTE: Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the
ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for conve-
nience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.
508 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable and position it
properly across the wheel opening.
Reinstalling The Retainer Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
And Positioning It
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 509
3. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the
curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
extensions through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube.
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the wheel
is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism
slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be overtight-
ened. Push against the tire several times to ensure it is
firmly in place.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Lug Wrench And Extension Tubes Assembled And In
Position
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
510 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (2500 And 3500
Series)
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly. Make
sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack
turn-screw. Snap tools into bracket assembly clips. In-
stall the jack into bracket assembly and turn the jack-
turn-screw clockwise until jack is snug into bracket
assembly.
3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the storage
position holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the
jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot
engages into the fastener on the floor.
NOTE: Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly
slides into the front hold down location.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
Jack Hold Down Fastener
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 511
4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan.
Reinstall the plastic cover.
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
off the ground.
CAUTION!
Use extreme caution when removing the front and rear
center caps. Damage can occur to the center cap and/or
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used. A pulling
motion, not a pry off motion, is recommended to
remove the caps.
For single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the flat blade on
the end of the lug wrench to pull the hub cap off. Insert the
blade end into the pull off notch and carefully pull the hub
cap off with a back and forth motion.
On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a
hook at one end that will fit in the pull off notch of the rear
hub caps. Position the hook and pull straight out on the
ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel skins
can now be removed. For the front hub cap, use the flat
blade on the end of the lug wrench to pull the caps off. The
wheel skin can now be removed.
CAUTION!
• Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap. Do not
use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap,
damage to the hub cap; finish may occur.
(Continued)
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)
512 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two
pull off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jack
handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch
before attempting to pull off.
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pull off the
wheel skins. Locate the hub cap pull notches (2 notches on
each cap). Insert the flat tip completely and using a back
and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug nut
bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber
mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly
seated around the wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to gain access
to the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only
jump directly off positive post which has a positive (+)
symbol on or around the post.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 513
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Positive Jumping Location
514 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on the
positive battery terminal. The resulting electrical cur-
rent will blow the fuse.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 515
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
516 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED
TRANSMISSION
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use one of the
following procedures to temporarily move the gear selec-
tor.
Column Gear Selector — If Equipped
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port
(ringed circle) on the bottom of the steering column, and
push and hold the override release lever up.
Gear Selector Override Access Port
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 517
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
Center Console Gear Selector — If Equipped
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
gear selector override access cover (located to the right
of the gear selector).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
hole, and push and hold the override release lever
down.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
Gear Selector Override Access Cover
518 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park Re-
lease. In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s
seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the
Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by
proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could
lead to serious injury or death for those in or around
the vehicle.
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is just above
the parking brake release handle, below and to the left
of the steering column.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
4. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the Manual
Park Release lever locking tab (just below the middle of
the lever) to the right.
Manual Park Release Pull Strap
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 519
5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged posi-
tion, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever rearward,
until it locks in place pointing towards the driver’s seat.
Release the locking tab and verify that the Manual Park
Release lever is locked in the released position.
6. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its
original position, until the locking tab snaps into place
to secure the lever.
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever
is locked in its stowed position.
4. Re-install the access cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or SECOND
GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while
gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: For trucks equipped with 8-speed automatic trans-
mission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
520 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmis-
sion and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may
also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in
the “Starting And Operating” section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be
placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from
the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to ⬙Air
Suspension⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for more informa-
tion. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for
example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened
to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these
instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause
loss of proper tie-down tension.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 521
Towing
Condition
Wheels
OFF The
Ground
2WD Models 4WD Models
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance (6–speed
transmission)
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance (8–speed
transmission)
See instructions in “Recreational Tow-
ing” under “Starting And Operating”
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
• Manual Transmission in gear (NOT
NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift
Or Dolly
Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to ”Manual Park Release” or “Gear
Selector Override” in this section for instructions on shift-
ing the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.
522 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on
the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions on
shifting the 8–speed transmission to NEUTRAL when
the engine is OFF.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km)
for 6–speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for
8–speed transmission.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) for 6–speed transmission, or 30 miles
(48 km) for 8–speed transmission, tow with the rear wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the front
wheels on the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 523
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward
direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer
case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK (for
automatic transmissions) or in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL,
for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational Towing”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information and
detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal dam-
age to the transmission or transfer case will occur if
a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage
to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
524 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 525
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING .................529
▫ Maintenance Plan ......................530
▫ Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ............534
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................534
▫ 3.6L Engine ..........................534
▫ 5.7L Engine ..........................535
▫ 6.4L Engine ..........................536
▫ Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine ...........537
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................537
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................538
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................538
▫ Engine Oil — Gas Engine .................539
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................541
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................542
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............544
▫ Front Driveshaft Lubrication — 2500/3500
(Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)............550
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ............551
▫ Body Lubrication ......................552
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................553
▫ Exhaust System ........................556
▫ Cooling System ........................558
▫ Brake System .........................563
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................565
▫ Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level ...............................568
▫ Transfer Case .........................569
䡵 HOISTING ............................569
䡵 TIRES ................................569
8
▫ Tire Safety Information ..................569
▫ Tires — General Information ..............579
▫ Tire Types ............................585
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................586
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..............589
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .............590
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations ............591
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................594
▫ Treadwear ............................594
▫ Traction Grades ........................594
▫ Temperature Grades .....................595
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE ..................595
䡵 BODYWORK ...........................595
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........595
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........596
▫ Preserving The Bodywork .................596
䡵 INTERIORS ............................599
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...................599
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts..................600
▫ Leather Parts ..........................601
▫ Glass Surfaces .........................601
528 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
1500 Models Only
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
2500 – 3500 Models Only
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
NOTE: Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350
hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a
dusty and off road environment or is operated predomi-
nantly at idle, or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of
vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 529
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering (2500/3500 Models
Only) and automatic transmission (six-speed only) and
fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Plan on the following pages for
required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
• Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4)
models only).
530 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
1500 Models:
Inspect the front and rear axle sur-
faces. If gear oil leakage is sus-
pected, check the fluid level. If us-
ing your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing, change axle fluid.
XX X X X
2500/3500 Models:
Inspect the front and rear axle sur-
faces. If gear oil leakage is sus-
pected, check the fluid level. If us-
ing your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing, change axle fluid.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary.
XXX X X X X
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 531
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X
Flush and replace the engine cool-
ant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter(s) (six-speed auto-
matic only), if using your vehicle
for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
XX
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter(s) (six-speed auto-
matic only).
X
532 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect the transfer case fluid,
change for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
XX
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 533
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5 — Battery
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
534 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5.7L Engine
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (6-Speed Trans Only) 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (2500/3500 Models Only)
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Battery
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 535
6.4L Engine
1 — Coolant Pressure Bottle 7 — Battery
2 — Transmission Dipstick 8 — Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Washer Solvent
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Air Cleaner Filter
6 — Aux Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
536 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.
Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom
of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the
safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer
fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for
a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield
washer solution used with water as directed on the con-
tainer, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to
avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 537
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
538 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil — Gas Engine
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for further information.
1500 Models Only
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
2500 – 3500 Models Only
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L/5.7L
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Selection — 6.4L
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 539
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and
10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engines (1500 Models
Only)
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 or equivalent Pennzoil or Shell Helix is
recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine
oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE: Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
(1500/2500/3500 Models)
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
540 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 6.4L Engine
Use Mopar SAE 0W-40 engine oil approved to FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS-12633 such as Pennzoil Ultra equivalent
is recommended for all operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 541
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you
find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change
your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.
3.6L/5.7L Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips
542 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
6.4L Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Spring Clips
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 543
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to
the housing assembly.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
(Continued)
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
544 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other service facili-
ties using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 545
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart-
ment door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment door
and release into dash panel.
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides
of the glove compartment door, push inward on both
sides of the glove compartment to release the glove
compartment travel stops.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
546 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. Disengage the glove compartment door from its hinges
by opening the glove compartment past the travel stop
and pulling it toward you.
5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the finger tabs
on each end of the filter cover.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
Filter Cover
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 547
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
Finger Tabs Finger Tab
548 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, press on each end until you hear an audible click.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment on the hinges.
9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall the glove
compartment past the travel stops by pushing in on the
glove compartment sides.
Cabin Air Filter
Glove Compartment Installation
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 549
NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
10. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by
inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and
sliding the clip away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
Front Driveshaft Lubrication — 2500/3500
(Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil
change.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
Front Drive Shaft Double Cardan Joint
550 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The grease fitting is located at the rear of the front
driveshaft, near the centering mechanism of double cardan
joint. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals. Use Mopar Type MS-6560 (lithium-
based grease), or equivalent.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Double Cardan Joint
1 — Double Cardan Joint
2 — Grease Fitting
3 — Exploded View – Grease Fitting
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 551
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
552 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the follow-
ing points:
• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 553
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the locking tab.
Windshield Wiper Arm
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3—WiperArm
Wiper Locking Assembly
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
554 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the arm
and use one finger push the release tab toward the
wiper arm.
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the
wiper arm.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the
wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade
down toward the base of the wiper arm and away from
the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Wiper Disengaging
1 — Locking Tab
2—Wiper
3 — Release Tab
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 555
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into
the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in
the wiper blade under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
until it is latched (engagement will be accompanied by
an audible click). Fold down the latch release tab and
snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
556 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 557
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation
of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
558 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 559
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
560 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Checking Coolant Level — 3.6L and 5.7L Engines
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be between the ADD and SAFE range on
the dipstick.
To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir
neck.
Opening The Coolant Reservoir
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 561
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine
coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine
The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle
should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” range on the
bottle when the engine is cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the cap unless checking for coolant
freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Ad-
vise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month. When additional
engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
Coolant Reservoir Dipstick
562 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 563
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service or immediately if
the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reser-
voir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” mark and a “MIN” mark. The fluid level must be
kept within these two marks. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
564 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”. It
is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical
flushes should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes
for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed transmissions.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check — Eight-Speed Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 565
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the trans-
mission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe transmission dam-
age.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed Transmission
It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is
at normal operating temperature (170-180°F / 77-82°C).
This normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of
driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot
be held comfortably between the fingertips. You can read
the transmission sump temperature in the instrument
cluster screen (refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” for
further information).
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the instru-
ment cluster display, and operate the vehicle as required
to reach the normal operating temperature. If the trans-
mission is not functioning properly, or the vehicle
cannot be driven, see the NOTE and CAUTION below
about checking the fluid level at colder temperatures.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this
procedure.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear
position (allowing time for the transmission to fully
engage in each position), ending with the transmission
in PARK.
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
566 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if
the actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level
should be between the “HOT” (upper) reference holes
on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the
fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube to
bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. Use ONLY
the specified fluid (see ⬙Fluids And Lubricants⬙ for fluid
specifications). After adding any quantity of oil through
the dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for
the oil to fully drain into the transmission before re-
checking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be be-
tween the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick with
the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only use the COLD region
of the dipstick as a rough reference when setting the fluid
level after a transmission service or fluid change. Re-check
the fluid level, and adjust as required, once the transmis-
sion reaches normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50 °F (10 °C) it may
not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until the
temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate
reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the
fluid.
8. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks. Release the park-
ing brake.
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal
for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully
seated position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
Fluid And Filter Changes — Eight-Speed
Transmission
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 567
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
sembled for any reason.
Fluid And Filter Changes — Six Speed Transmission
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filters if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information. This inspection should be made
with the vehicle in a level position.
For 1500 Model axles, the fluid level should be even with
the bottom of the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge
of hole) for the FDU215 HD front axle and C235FE rear
axle.
For all 2500/3500 Model axles, the fluid level should be
1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the
9.25 in front and 3/4 in ± 1/4 in (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on
10.5 in rear axles. The 11.5 in rear axle level should be
1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tion” for further information.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials
1500 Model rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential require that 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip
Additive be added to the gear lubricant. Refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specification” for further
information. The Mopar Limited Slip Additive should be
added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is
made to an axle equipped with a Limited Slip Differential.
2500/3500 Model axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited
slip oil additive (friction modifiers).
568 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE: When refilling an axle with a Limited Slip Differ-
ential, (which requires a Limited Slip Additive), the Lim-
ited Slip Additive should be added before the gear lubri-
cant is added to insure proper additive fill.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
Transfer Case
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug.
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler
plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking
locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking locations.
However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on
any other parts of the underbody.
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 569
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
570 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 571
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
572 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
–
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
01 means the year 2001
–
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 573
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
574 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 575
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
576 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 577
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
578 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 579
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
580 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 581
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
582 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 583
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
584 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 585
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
586 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door
opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire
descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 587
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
588 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome
plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral
Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recom-
mended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always
wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activ-
ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 589
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
Please follow the table below for proper tire size, chain
type, and axle recommendations:
Vehicle Axle Recommendations Tire Sizes Chain Class
1500 Models Rear Only P265/70R17 S Class
2500 Models Rear Only LT245/70R17E
LT275/70R18E
U Class
2500 Power Wagon Models Rear Only LT285/70R17D U Class
3500 (Single Rear Wheel)
Models
Rear Only LT275/70R18E U Class
3500 (Dual Rear Wheel)
Models
Front/Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
590 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 591
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Directional Tires — If Equipped
For the R/T package with 22” tires and wheels, the
rotational direction of the tire must be taken into consid-
eration when rotating the tires. The recommended rotation
pattern for directional tires is shown below.
Tire Rotation
Tire Rotation
592 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all four
tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Information System (TPIS):
• The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses
unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to help identify
them from the outer rear wheels, because of this, the
inner and outer wheel locations can’t be switched.
• After a tire rotation is completed, as shown below, the
system can auto learn the locations of each sensor ID.
Auto learning/localization occurs when the vehicle ig-
nition status is changed from Off to On and speeds of
greater than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain
over 5 mph (8km/h) for at about a 15 minute period.
You may need to drive for 20 minutes to account slower
speeds and stops.
• If the tires are rotated incorrectly, The auto localization
of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate correctly resulting
in incorrect locations for the pressure values displayed
in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
• 3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one approved
direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the
asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the On/Off-
Road tire and the use of Outline White Letter (OWL)
tires.
• When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to be
remounted on the rim, or installed at a different
location, to maintain the correct placement of the tire
on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position on
(Continued)
Tire Rotation
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 593
CAUTION! (Continued)
the truck. For example, if the spare is used to replace
an outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on the
rim so that the wheel is dished inward. That way the
tread design of asymmetrical tires and the white
writing of the OWL tires will maintain proper posi-
tion.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
594 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize
the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
•
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 595
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold Tonneau
cover, use Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and
Mopar Leather and Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
596 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Bumper Care
The customer is responsible to clean and maintain the
chrome components of the vehicle. Washing away road
debris and salt using an automotive soap. Bumpers should
be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and
water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Your bumpers are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can stain or damage the protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the bumper’s protective finish. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or
equivalent is recommended.
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions, strong alkaline additives, or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the bumper’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Chrome Cleaner,
or equivalent is recommended.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 597
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On
Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty
hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV expo-
sure will lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss over
time.
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On Bed-
liner, the manufacturer recommends you periodically rinse
all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your truck at
least twice per year using the Mopar Spray-On Bedliner
Conditioner available at your local authorized dealer.
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-On
Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any
loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft
cloth or brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar Spray-On
Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and
wipe over the entire surface of the truck bedliner.
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products to clean
your bedliner. Silicon-based products can become slip-
pery and may result in personal injury.
598 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many dif-
ferent types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil, hydraulic
fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill occurs on your
Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as possible
to avoid permanent damage.
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a Spray-On
Bedliner. One common condition is when loading a heavy
pallet and dragging that pallet across the floor of the bed.
If a nail or sharp point is exposed under the weight of the
pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While not covered by
your new vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the
metal exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear or
gouge, follow the directions provided in the Mopar Quick
Repair Kit.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 599
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft
cloth until all residue is removed.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
600 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 601
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA...................605
▫ Vehicle Identification Number .............605
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................605
▫ Hydraulic Brake Assist — 2500/3500 Models Only
(Except Power Wagon) ...................605
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .606
▫ Torque Specifications ....................606
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................608
▫ 3.6L Engine ...........................608
▫ 5.7L Engine ..........................608
▫ 6.4L Engine ...........................609
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................609
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................609
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............610
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .610
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......611
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................611
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................611
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............612
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) ........612
▫ E-85 General Information .................612
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85)......................612
▫ Fuel Requirements .....................613
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ..............613
▫ Starting .............................614
▫ Cruising Range ........................614
▫ Replacement Parts ......................614
9
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Informa-
tion Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle,
the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated
brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still
function. However, you will experience a substantial in-
crease in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
braking capability, the remaining system will still function
with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application,
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation
of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
Light” (if equipped) during brake use.
Hydraulic Brake Assist — 2500/3500 Models Only
(Except Power Wagon)
The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-
boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering
system. You may experience some clicking or hissing
noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking
conditions.
NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches
operating temperature.
Vehicle Identification Number
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 605
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/
Bolt Torque
Lug Nut/
Bolt Type
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
Cone M14 x 1.50 22 mm
140 Ft-Lbs
(190 N·m)
Flanged
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
NOTE: Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The
lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being
rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add two drops
of oil at the interface between the lug nut/bolt and the
washer. Do not oil wheel studs.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Two-Piece Lug Nut
606 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half-
way).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Wheel Mounting Surface Four And Five Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 607
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of higher octane “Premium” gaso-
line will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded gaso-
line having an octane range of 87 to 89 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is rec-
ommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
608 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.4L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engines is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satis-
factory fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded gaso-
line having a posted octane number
range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane
“Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance
and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 609
gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a
list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
610 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 611
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY)
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Gasoline Only and/or a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the
other sections of this manual for information on features
that are common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible
Fuel powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
612 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking
materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near
the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas
cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning
agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating greater than 87
(R+M)/2, or solely E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating be-
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard start-
ing and/or driveability problems during warm up.
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline addi-
tive, such as Mopar Injector Cleanup or Techron may be
used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated
engine oils. These special requirements are included in
Mopar engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA US
Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains
additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet
testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC
engines.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 613
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time it
takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a
deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until
the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than
gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experi-
enced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and
the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%,
compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may
affect drivability.
614 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 32 Gallons 121 Liters
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
6.4L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40 engine oil meeting
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.)
7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032.)
13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
5.7L Engine – 1500 Models (We recommend you use Mopar
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 615
U.S. Metric
5.7L Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you use Mopar
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
6.4 Liter Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you use Mopar
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 may
be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
616 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Oil – 6.4L For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that
meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The manufac-
turer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine
oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar brand Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85)
Engine – If Equipped
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L/6.4L Engines 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling sys-
tem in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
(Continued)
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 617
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – Eight-Speed Automatic Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmis-
sion.
Automatic Transmission – Six-Speed Automatic with Gaso-
line Engine (For Diesel Engine see Diesel Supplement)
Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to
use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission. We recommend Mopar ATF+4 fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar BW44–44 Transfer Case
Fluid.
Front Axle – 1500 Four-Wheel Drive Models We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubri-
cant SAE 75W-85.
618 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Rear Axle – 1500 Models We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 (MS-A0160). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require
the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip Additive
(MS-10111).
Front and Rear Axle – 2500/3500 Models We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5
Synthetic Axle Lubricant. Limited slip additive is not
required for Limited-Slip Rear Axles.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir – 2500/3500 Models We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4 or
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 619
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................623
䡵 DRAG & DROP MENU BAR ................623
䡵 CYBERSECURITY .......................624
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................625
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3
Personal Settings .......................626
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV Personal Settings .............645
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ............................665
▫ Radio Operation........................665
▫ Media Mode ..........................665
▫ CD Player — If Equipped .................666
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .666
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .667
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........667
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ...........................668
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................668
▫ Get Started ...........................670
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................671
▫ Radio ...............................672
▫ Media ...............................674
▫ Phone ...............................676
▫ Voice Text Reply .......................677
▫ Climate (4C/4C NAV) ...................679
▫ Navigation (4C NAV) ....................679
▫ SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If
Equipped ............................680
▫ Register (4C/4C NAV) ...................681
10
▫ Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) ................681
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV).............682
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ..............683
▫ Using Do Not Disturb ...................683
▫ Android Auto — If Equipped ..............684
▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped ..............685
▫ General Information .....................686
▫ Additional Information ...................686
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ............687
622 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on
the main menu bar.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Main Menu
10
MULTIMEDIA 623
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
624 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/support/
software-update.html (U.S. Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Pri-
vacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features. Many
features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 3 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On
The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
10
MULTIMEDIA 625
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3
Personal Settings
Push the MORE or SETTINGS button on the faceplate, then
press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen (if
equipped) to display the settings menu screen. In this
mode the Uconnect system allows you to access program-
mable features that may be equipped such as Display,
Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights,
Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off
Options, Suspension, Trailer Brake, Audio, Compass Set-
tings, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped),
Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Informa-
tion.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until the
button is highlighted. Once the setting is complete, either
press the back arrow or the “Done” button on the touch-
screen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the
previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons
on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the list of available
settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the RUN position.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
626 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Set Language English, Français, Español
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Fuel Saver Display On Off
NOTE:
The “Fuel Saver Display” feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
Units — If Equipped
After pressing “Units” on the touchscreen, the following
will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
10
MULTIMEDIA 627
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time 12 hour 24 hour
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time” feature, press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select
“AM” or “PM.”
Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow
628 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the
vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h). It provides an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to
other objects.
Front ParkSense Chime
Volume
Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Chime
Volume — If Equipped
Low Med High
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior side-view mirrors tilt downward when the ignition
is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
10
MULTIMEDIA 629
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see ac-
tive guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The im-
age is displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note disappears.
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay
On Off
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned
ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines is displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting out of REVERSE
unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is
switched to the OFF position.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system automatically activates the windshield wipers if
it senses moisture on the windshield.
630 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system becomes active.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Headlight Illumination On Ap-
proach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If
Equipped
On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 631
Setting Name Selectable Options
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or un-
locked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is
in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Remote Door Unlock All Driver
632 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “Remote Door Unlock” feature allows you to program your remote door locks to open “All doors” or only the
“Driver door” with the first push of the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.
Sound Horn With Remote
Start
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” feature is selected, the horn sounds when the remote start is activated.
Memory Linked To Fob —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
•
The “Memory Linked To Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
•
The seat returns to the memorized seat location if “Memory Linked To Fob” is set to (On) when the key fob is
used to unlock the door.
Passive Entry — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
10
MULTIMEDIA 633
Setting Name Selectable Options
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or un-
locked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated
Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected the driv-
er’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
634 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped On Off
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Engine Off Power Delay 0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped On Off
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sound Horn With Lower On Off
Flash Lights With Lower On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 635
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Entry/Exit Suspension” feature is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height posi-
tion when vehicle shifted to park for easy entry/exit.
Display Suspension Messages All Warning Only
Automatic Aero Mode (1500 Model
Only)
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Automatic Aero Mode” feature is selected, the Ride Height will automatically be adjusted depending on
the vehicle speed.
Tire Jack Mode On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while
the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire.
Transport Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
636 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Wheel Alignment Mode On Off
NOTE:
The “Wheel Alignment Mode” feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel align-
ment service. Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be enabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for
further information.
Trailer Brake
After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Trailer Brake Type Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
10
MULTIMEDIA 637
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Front Back Left Right
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or
use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer +–
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
Speed Adjusted Vol-
ume
Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
638 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
AUX Volume Offset
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input.
Loudness — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
10
MULTIMEDIA 639
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Variance 123456789101112131415
NOTE:
•
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the
compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
•
Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptops and
Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sen-
sor, and it may give false readings.
Perform Compass Calibra-
tion
On Off
NOTE: Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating,
which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and com-
pleting one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will now
function normally.
640 MULTIMEDIA
Compass Variance Zone Map
10
MULTIMEDIA 641
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the
“Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
642 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their de-
fault settings. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to de-
fault?” select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.
10
MULTIMEDIA 643
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. If “Yes” is se-
lected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “Can-
cel” to exit.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
System Information System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see an authorized dealer for
further information.
644 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV Personal Settings
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the settings
menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you
to access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped),
Engine Off Options, Suspension, Trailer Brake, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore
Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the back arrow button on the touchscreen or
the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of
available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the RUN position.
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Language English Français Español
10
MULTIMEDIA 645
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
NOTE:
When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to
activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
+–
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
Headlights OFF
+–
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme Pre-configured Themes
Units US Metric
646 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Navigation Turn-By-Turn
In Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
Controls Screen Time-Out
— If Equipped
On Off
Fuel Saver Display in
Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never w/Help Always
10
MULTIMEDIA 647
Clock
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If
Equipped
On Off
Set Time Hours –+
Set Time Minutes –+
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
AM PM
Show Time In Status Bar — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature allows you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
648 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera
Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
10
MULTIMEDIA 649
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense Sound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h).
Front ParkSense Chime
Volume
Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Chime
Volume
Low Med High
Tilt Side Mirrors In Re-
verse — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when
the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
650 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of
the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above
the rear License plate.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guidelines — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see Ac-
tive (Dynamic) Guidelines which deflect with steering wheel angle over the ParkView Back up Camera display when-
ever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with
a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView Backup Camera display to
remain on while in drive for up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (12 km/h).
10
MULTIMEDIA 651
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wip-
ers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
Trailer Length For Blind
Spot Alert
Auto Max (36 feet)
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Two Or Four Corner Air
Suspension Modes — If
Equipped
Tire Jack Mode Transport Mode Wheel Alignment Mode
NOTE:
There are four air suspension modes designed to protect the system in unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to
assist in changing a spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flat bed towed. Wheel
Alignment Mode is selected before performing a wheel alignment, refer to an authorized dealer for information.
652 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the “Mirror and Wipers” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlights with Wipers On Off
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay +–
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30,
60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Headlight Illumination On Ap-
proach
+–
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0,
30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
10
MULTIMEDIA 653
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the head-
lights will turn on approximately ten seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
Auto Dim High Beams — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under
certain conditions.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps will flash when the doors are locked or un-
locked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
654 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmis-
sion is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals flash when the doors are locked
or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature se-
lected.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote
Start
On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 655
Setting Name Selectable Options
1st Press Of Key Fob Un-
locks
Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
•
When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is selected, only the driver’s door unlocks on the first press of
the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
•
When “All Doors” is selected, all of the doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
•
If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors will unlock no matter which
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed,
only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.
•
With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than
once only results in the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver’s door is opened, the
interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.
Personal Settings Linked
To Key Fob — If
Equipped
On Off
656 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
•
The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver
mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
•
The seats return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to on) when the
key fob is used to unlock the door.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power Delay –+
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to ten minutes after the igni-
tion is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay –+
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30,
60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
10
MULTIMEDIA 657
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped On Off
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is
shut off.
Air Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sound Horn With Lower On Off
NOTE:
When the “Sound Horn With Lower” feature is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the key fob remote
lower button is pushed.
Flash Lights With Lower On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lower” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the key fob
remote lower button is pressed twice. This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lower feature
selected.
658 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Suspension Display Messages All Warning
Automatic Aero Mode (1500 Model
Only)
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Automatic Aero Mode” feature is selected, the Ride Height will automatically be adjusted depending on
the vehicle speed.
Tire Jack Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare
tire.
Transport Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system lowers and then disables to assist with flat
bed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode On Off
NOTE:
Before performing a wheel alignment, the “Wheel Alignment Mode” must be enabled. Refer to your authorized
dealer for further information.
10
MULTIMEDIA 659
Trailer
After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Trailer Brake Type Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Front Back Left Right
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or
use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer +–
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
660 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Speed Adjusted Vol-
ume
Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
AUX Volume Offset
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 661
Phone/Bluetooth Settings
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto
Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones and Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and
Audio Sources Settings system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
662 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using
one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you
will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
10
MULTIMEDIA 663
Reset Settings
After pressing the “Reset Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer OK Cancel
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE: When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth de-
vices and presets.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “Software License” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the
system software version.
664 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the back
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or
Media etc.)
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Rearview Of Steering
Wheel)
10
MULTIMEDIA 665
CD Player — If Equipped
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go
to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track. If you push the switch up or down three
times, it will play the third, etc.
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located inside the center console upper lid, this feature
allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into
the USB port.
iPod control supports the following: iPod/iPod classic,
iPod mini, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, iPod touch, and iPhone
devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully sup-
port the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s website
for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or visit UconnectPhone.com.
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
1 — USB Port #1
2 — Aux Jack
3 — USB Port #2
666 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
10
MULTIMEDIA 667
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect system.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps
menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4C
NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C system.
Uconnect 3.0
668 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
10
MULTIMEDIA 669
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is located in the head-
liner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, End A Phone Call, Or Send/Receive
A Text
670 MULTIMEDIA
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the top of the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 3.0
Uconnect 3
10
MULTIMEDIA 671
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“Help.” The system provides you with a list of com-
mands.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
Uconnect 3.0
672 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
10
MULTIMEDIA 673
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• “ Change source to Bluetooth”
• “ Change source to AUX”
• “ Change source to USB”
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 3.0
674 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
10
MULTIMEDIA 675
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Call John Smith”
• “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 3.0
676 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the
Phone button
and say “ Listen.” (Must have compat-
ible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
Phone button
. After the beep, say: “ Reply.”
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
10
MULTIMEDIA 677
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
678 MULTIMEDIA
Climate (4C/4C NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
• “ Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you do not know exactly
how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the
beep, say: “ Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate
10
MULTIMEDIA 679
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) net-
work connection compatible with your device.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started.
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska, Hawaii, and Canada. Services can only be used
where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation
680 MULTIMEDIA
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate ser-
vices in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate
on the web.
For further information:
• U.S. residents visit: siriusxm.com/guardian
• Canadian residents visit: siriusxm.ca/guardian
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and playing your favorite music in your car.
Mobile App
10
MULTIMEDIA 681
To use the Uconnect App:
• Download the Uconnect App to your mobile device.
• Press the Info button on the navigation bar at the bottom
of the app for Vehicle Info.
• Press the Remote button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely.
• Press the Location button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your vehicle’s navigation
system.
• Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the
app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call
Centers.
NOTE: For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Show fuel prices”
• “ Show 5 - day weather forecast”
• “ Show extended weather”
TIP:
Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link
682 MULTIMEDIA
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and re-
sponds back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri Eyes Free
Available
10
MULTIMEDIA 683
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes-
sage, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen
on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your Android powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-
provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
684 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are
trademarks of Google Inc.
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
10
MULTIMEDIA 685
NOTE: Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface
is a product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of
Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and
privacy statements apply.
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
686 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-
855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-
465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents call:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents call:1-877-324-9091
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
10
MULTIMEDIA 687
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................690
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............690
▫ Prepare A List .........................690
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............690
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................690
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............691
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........691
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................691
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........691
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................692
▫ Service Contract .......................692
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............693
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................693
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............693
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .693
▫ In Canada ............................694
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............694
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
690 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 691
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract
that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufac-
turer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract
that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require
service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
692 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 693
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
694 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............559
Adding Fuel ..............................424
Additives, Fuel ............................609
Adjust
Down ...............................46, 47
Forward .............................45, 47
Rearward ............................45, 47
Up .................................46, 47
Adjustable Pedals ...........................61
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ........................245
Air Bag Warning Light .....................242
Enhanced Accident Response .............256, 525
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................525
If Deployment Occurs .....................255
Knee Impact Bolsters ......................245
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............258
Maintenance ............................258
Transporting Pets ........................285
Air Bag Light.......................192, 242, 287
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......542
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................544
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ................544, 545
Air Conditioner System ......................544
Air Conditioning ...........................100
Air Conditioning Filter ...................103, 545
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...............101
Air Filter ................................542
Air Pressure
Tires..................................580
Air Suspension .........................354, 360
Alarm
Panic ..................................21
Security Alarm........................32, 193
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .................................6
Android Auto .............................684
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................559, 615
Disposal ...............................561
Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) .................208
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................198
Apple CarPlay ............................685
Ashtray .................................136
Assist, Hill Start ...........................210
Audio Systems (Radio).......................623
Auto Down Power Windows ..................105
Automatic Door Locks........................40
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...........101
Automatic Transmission ..................307, 567
Adding Fluid ........................566, 567
696 INDEX
Fluid And Filter Changes ...............567, 568
Fluid Change ...........................567
Fluid Level Check .....................565, 566
Fluid Type ..........................565, 618
Shifting ............................315, 324
Special Additives .........................565
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ........312
AuxCord................................666
Auxiliary Switches..........................137
Axle Fluid ............................568, 618
Axle Lubrication ...........................568
Back-Up .................................421
Back-Up Camera ...........................421
Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System ...................370
Battery...............................194, 538
Charging System Light ....................194
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................22
Belts, Seat ................................286
Body Builders Guide..........................6
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................552
B-Pillar Location ...........................575
Brake Assist System .........................210
Brake Control System........................209
Brake Fluid ...........................564, 618
Brake System ..........................563, 605
Fluid Check ............................564
Master Cylinder .........................564
Parking ...............................303
Warning Light ...........................192
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................307
Bulb Replacement ..........................464
Bulbs, Light ...........................289, 464
Cab Top Clearance Lights.....................470
Camera .................................421
Camera, Rear .............................421
Camper .................................151
Capacities,
Fluid ...........................615
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ......................534, 540, 541
Power Steering ..........................404
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................560
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................286, 612
Cargo Light ...............................77
Car Washes...............................596
Cellular Phone ............................667
Center High Mounted Stop Light ...............469
Center Seat Storage Compartment...............122
Change Oil Indicator ........................177
12
INDEX 697
Changing A Flat Tire ........................479
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................571
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .204
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............285
Checks, Safety.............................285
Child Restraint ............................259
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................263
Child Seat Installation ..................275, 276
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ........273
Infant And Child Restraints .................261
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............269
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......265
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........262
Seating Positions .........................264
Cigar Lighter .............................136
Clean Air Gasoline .........................609
Cleaning
Wheels ................................589
Climate Control ............................85
Manual ................................85
Cold Weather Operation......................302
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance................687
Compact Spare Tire .........................587
Contract, Service ...........................692
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............560
Cooling System ............................558
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................559
Coolant Capacity .........................615
Coolant Level ....................558, 561, 562
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................561
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................558
Inspection ..........................561, 562
Points To Remember ......................562
Pressure Cap ............................560
Radiator Cap ...........................560
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......559,
615, 616
Corrosion Protection ........................595
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .................404
Cruise Light ...........................201, 202
Cupholders...............................131
Customer Assistance ........................690
Customer Programmable Features...............645
Cybersecurity .............................624
Daytime Running Lights ......................73
Dealer Service .............................538
Defroster, Rear Window.......................85
Defroster, Windshield........................287
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ....................83
698 INDEX
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................203
Differential, Limited-Slip .....................386
Dipsticks
Power Steering ..........................404
Disabled Vehicle Towing .....................521
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................561
Disturb..................................683
Door Ajar ................................195
Door Ajar Light............................195
Door Locks
Automatic ..............................40
Doors....................................34
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................42
Driving
Off-Pavement ...........................372
Off-Road ..............................372
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................453
Dual Rear Wheels .......................593, 606
E-85 Fuel ................................612
Electrical Power Outlets ......................132
Electric Brake Control System ..................209
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................208
Electronic Roll Mitigation ...............213, 217
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . .336, 340, 346, 350
Electronic Range Select (ERS)............313, 320, 330
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............213
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........194
Emergency Brake...........................303
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................459
Jacking ................................479
Jump Starting ...........................513
Emission Control System Maintenance............204
Engine ...........................534, 535, 536
Air Cleaner .............................542
Block Heater ............................302
Break-In Recommendations .................303
Compartment ...........................534
Compartment
Identification ...........534, 535, 536
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................616
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................286, 612
Fails To Start ............................301
Flooded, Starting .........................301
Fuel Requirements ....................608, 615
Jump Starting ...........................513
Oil ............................539, 615, 616
Oil Filler Cap .....................534, 540, 541
12
INDEX 699
Oil Filter ...............................541
Oil Selection .........................539, 615
Oil Synthetic ............................541
Overheating ............................516
Starting ...............................297
Engine Oil Viscosity .....................540, 541
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................540
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........256, 525
Entry System, Illuminated .....................81
Ethanol ..............................610, 612
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................286, 612
Exhaust System ........................286, 556
Exterior Lights ..........................71, 289
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................542
Air Conditioning .....................103, 545
Engine Oil ..........................541, 616
Engine Oil Disposal .......................541
Flashers
Turn Signals ......................77, 201, 289
Flash-To-Pass ..............................74
Flat Tire Stowage .......................491, 508
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ..........................614
Engine Oil .............................613
Fuel Requirements ....................612, 613
Maintenance ............................614
Replacement Parts ........................614
Starting ...............................614
Fluid, Brake ..............................618
Fluid Capacities............................615
Fluid Leaks...............................289
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .................................564
Power Steering ..........................404
Fluids And Lubricants .......................616
Fog Lights .............................76, 467
Fold Flat Load Floor ........................126
Fold-Flat
Seats .............................42
Four-Way Hazard Flasher.....................459
Four Wheel Drive ..........................333
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................520
Front Axle (Differential) ......................568
Fuel ....................................608
Adding ...............................424
Additives ..............................609
Clean Air ..............................609
Ethanol ............................610, 612
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ......................425
700 INDEX
Flexible ...............................612
Gasoline ...............................608
Light .................................198
Materials Added .........................609
Methanol ..............................610
Octane Rating ........................608, 616
Requirements ........................608, 615
Tank Capacity ...........................615
Fuses ...................................473
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ...............112
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .....................425
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................609
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................609
Gear Ranges...........................316, 325
Gear Selector Override.......................517
General Information.........................227
Glass Cleaning ............................601
Grocery Bag Retainer.........................57
Gross Axle Weight Rating.....................428
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...................427
Guide
Body Builders ............................6
GVWR ..................................425
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................453
Hazard Warning Flasher......................459
Headlights ...............................466
Automatic ..............................74
Automatic High Beam ......................73
Cleaning ...............................596
High Beam ..............................73
Passing ................................74
Switch .................................71
Head Restraints ............................57
Heated Mirrors .............................69
Heater, Engine Block ........................302
Hill Descent Control ........................218
Hill Descent Control Indicator .................218
Hill Start Assist ............................210
Hitches
T
railer Towing ...........................433
Hoisting .................................569
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ...............112
Hood Prop ...............................111
Hood Release .............................111
Hub Caps ................................512
12
INDEX 701
Ignition ..................................26
Switch .................................26
Illuminated Entry ...........................81
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ......................30
Inside Rearview Mirror .................63, 64, 459
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ............................201
Display ...............................172
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................600
Integrated Trailer Brake Controls................438
Interior Appearance Care .....................599
Interior Lights..............................79
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)...............83
Introduction ................................4
Inverter
Power ................................136
iPod/USB/MP3 Control......................666
Jack Location ..........................479, 496
Jack Operation ............................479
Jump Starting .............................513
Key Fob
Panic Alarm .............................21
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........25, 31
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....22
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ......25
Key-In Reminder............................28
Keyless Enter-N-Go ......................36, 297
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ................632, 655
Passive Entry ............................36
Passive Entry Programming ..............36, 655
Keys ....................................18
Replacement .............................31
Sentry (Immobilizer) .......................30
Lane Change And Turn Signals .................77
Lane Change Assist ..........................77
Latches..................................289
Hood .................................111
Lead Free Gasoline .........................608
Leaks, Fluid ..............................289
Life Of Tires ..............................583
Light Bulbs ...........................289, 464
Lights ................................81, 289
A
irBag.........................192, 242, 287
Automatic Headlights ......................74
Automatic High Beam ......................73
Brake Assist Warning ......................216
Brake Warning ..........................192
702 INDEX
Bulb Replacement ........................464
Cap Top Clearance .......................470
Cargo .................................77
Center Mounted Stop ......................469
Courtesy/Reading ......................79, 80
Cruise .............................201, 202
Daytime Running .........................73
Engine Temperature Warning ................193
Exterior ...............................289
Fog................................76, 467
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator .................335
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................459
Headlights ..............................71
High Beam ..............................73
Hill Descent Control Indicator ...............218
Interior ..............................79, 80
Low Fuel ..............................198
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........195
Park ..................................201
Passing ................................74
Seat Belt Reminder .......................191
Security Alarm ..........................193
Service ................................464
Side Marker ............................472
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............221
Traction Control .........................216
Transfer Case ...........................335
Turn Signal .........................466, 468
Turn Signals ......................77, 201, 289
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . .193, 201
Limited-Slip Differential ..................386, 568
Loading Vehicle............................425
Tires..................................575
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .................189
Load Shed Battery Saver On...................189
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction.............189
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor .............189
Locks
Automatic
Door ..........................40
Child Protection ..........................40
Power Door .............................36
Low Tire Pressure System.....................221
Lubrication, Body ..........................552
Lug Nuts ................................606
Maintenance Free Battery .....................538
Maintenance Schedule .......................529
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .195, 204
Manual
Park Release ............................519
12
INDEX 703
Manual, Service............................694
Manual Transmission
Fluid Level Check ........................569
Lubricant Selection .......................618
Media Hub ...............................666
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ................42
Memory Seat ............................42, 48
Memory Seats And Radio .....................42
Methanol ................................610
Mirrors ..................................63
Electric Powered ..........................66
Heated .................................69
Memory ................................48
Outside ................................65
Rearview .........................63, 64, 459
Trailer Towing ...........................69
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .................................6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................221
Mopar Parts ..............................693
MP3 Control ..............................666
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................73
Navigation System (Uconnect GPS) ..............421
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................303
Occupant Restraints.........................227
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .................608
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ............372, 454
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ............372, 454
Oil Change Indicator ........................177
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ...................177
Oil, Engine............................539, 616
Capacity ...............................615
Change Interval .........................539
Dipstick ...............................537
Disposal ...............................541
Filter ..............................541, 616
Filter Disposal ...........................541
Identification Logo .......................540
Materials Added To .......................541
Pr
essure Warning Light ....................194
Recommendation .....................539, 615
Synthetic ..............................541
Viscosity ........................540, 541, 615
Oil Filter, Change ..........................541
Oil Filter, Selection..........................541
Oil Pressure Light ..........................194
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................203
704 INDEX
Operating Precautions .......................203
Operator Manual
Owner’s Manual ...........................5
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................65
Overdrive ............................323, 331
Overdrive OFF Switch....................323, 331
Overheating, Engine ........................516
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .............694
Paint Care................................595
Panic Alarm ...............................21
Parking Brake .............................303
ParkSense System, Rear ...................408, 415
Passive Entry ..............................36
Pedals, Adjustable ...........................61
Personal Settings ...........................184
Pets ....................................285
Pickup Box ........................138, 140, 155
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........575
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) ..................473
Door Locks ..............................36
Inverter ...............................136
Mirrors ................................66
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ............132
Seats ..................................45
Sliding Rear Window ......................107
Steering .........................402, 403, 404
Sunroof ...............................108
Windows ..............................104
Power Seats
Down ...............................46, 47
Forward .............................45, 47
Rearward ............................45, 47
Recline .................................46
Tilt.................................46, 47
Up .................................46, 47
Power Steering Fluid ........................618
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................238
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................239
Programmable Electronic Features...............184
Radial
Ply Tires ............................581
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .........558, 560
Radio Frequency
General Information ................25, 30, 32, 39
Radio Operation ...........................667
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...................84
Ramp Travel Index .........................372
12
INDEX 705
Rear Axle (Differential) ......................568
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ..................150
Rear ParkSense System ...................408, 415
Rear Seats, Folding ..........................55
Reclining Rear Seats .........................44
Recreational Towing.........................447
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .........449
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .......451
Reformulated Gasoline.......................609
Refrigerant ...............................545
Release, Hood .............................111
Reminder, Seat Belt .........................229
Remote Keyless Entry ........................20
Panic Alarm .............................21
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........25, 31
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .....................29
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .....634
Uconnect Settings ........................634
Replacement Bulbs .........................464
Replacement Keys ...........................31
Replacement Tires ..........................584
Reporting Safety Defects .....................693
Restraints, Child ...........................259
Restraints, Head ............................57
Rotation, Tires.............................591
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................286
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................289
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................693
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................286
Safety Information, Tire ......................569
Safety Tips ...............................285
Schedule, Maintenance.......................529
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......234
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........239
Seat Belt Reminder .........................191
Seat Belts .............................228, 286
Adjustable
Shoulder Belt ...................234
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........234
Child Restraints .........................259
Energy Management Feature ................239
Extender ...............................238
Front Seat ..........................228, 232
Inspection ..............................286
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................232
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............234
Operating Instructions .....................232
Pregnant Women .........................238
706 INDEX
Pretensioners ...........................239
Reminder ..............................229
Seat Belt Extender ........................238
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................239
Untwisting Procedure .....................234
Seat Belts Maintenance.......................600
Seats.............................42, 44, 45, 47
Adjustment ........................42, 45, 47
Easy Entry ..............................50
Folding Floor ...........................126
Memory ................................48
Power .................................45
Rear Folding ........................42, 54, 55
Reclining Rear ...........................44
Tilting .................................42
Security Alarm ..........................32, 193
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............616
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................31
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................30
Sentry Key Replacement ......................31
Service Assistance ..........................690
Service Contract ...........................692
Service Manuals ...........................694
Settings, Personal ..........................184
Shifting .................................305
Automatic Transmission .............307, 315, 324
Transfer Case ...........................335
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) .............................449
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) .............................451
Shift Lever Override ........................517
Signals, Turn ........................77, 201, 289
Siri.....................................683
Sliding Rear Window, Power ..................107
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................590
Snow Plow ...............................444
Snow Tires ...............................586
Spare Tires.........................586,
587, 588
Spark Plugs ..............................616
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ............................407
Cancel ................................407
Resume ...............................407
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................404
Stabilizer/Sway Bar System ...................370
Starting ..............................296, 297
Automatic Transmission ....................296
Button .................................26
12
INDEX 707
Cold Weather ...........................302
Engine Fails To Start ......................301
Starting And Operating ......................297
Starting Procedures .........................297
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ...............296
Steering
Power ..........................402, 403, 404
Tilt Column .............................60
Wheel, Heated .........................60, 61
Wheel, Tilt ..............................60
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................665
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .665
Storage Compartment, Center Seat ..............122
Storage, Vehicle ........................102, 595
Storing Your Vehicle ........................595
Stuck, Freeing .............................520
Sun Roof ................................108
Suspension, Air ........................354, 360
Sway Control, Trailer ........................218
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................541
Tailgate .................................152
Telescoping Steering Column ...................60
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ...........101
Tilt
Down ...............................46, 47
Up .................................46, 47
Tilt Steering Column .........................60
Tip Start .................................297
Tire And Loading Information Placard............575
Tire Markings .............................570
Tires..........................289, 579, 586, 594
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................583
Air Pressure ............................579
Chains ................................590
Changing ..............................479
Compact Spare ..........................587
Dual ..............................593, 606
General Information ...................579,
586
High Speed .............................581
Inflation Pressure ........................580
Jacking ................................479
Life Of Tires ............................583
Load Capacity .......................575, 576
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........197, 221
Quality Grading .........................594
Radial ................................581
Replacement ............................584
Rotation ...............................591
708 INDEX
Safety .............................569, 579
Sizes .................................571
Snow Tires .............................586
Spare Tires ..........................586, 588
Spinning ...............................582
Trailer Towing ...........................436
Tread Wear Indicators .....................582
Wheel Nut Torque ........................606
Tire Safety Information.......................569
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................434
Tonneau Cover .........................154, 596
Tonneau Cover Cleaning .....................596
To Open Hood.............................111
Torque Converter Clutch ..................324, 332
Towing ..............................427, 521
Disabled Vehicle .........................521
Guide .................................434
Recreational ............................447
Weight ................................434
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..................447
Traction .................................453
Traction Control ...........................213
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ....................218
Trailer Towing.............................427
Cooling System Tips ......................443
Hitches ................................433
Minimum Requirements ....................435
Mirrors ................................69
Tips ..................................442
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................434
Wiring ................................441
Trailer Towing Guide ........................434
Trailer Weight .............................434
Transfer Case .............................569
Electronically Shifted ............336, 340, 346, 350
Fluid .................................618
T
ransmission..............................307
Automatic ....................307, 315, 324, 565
Fluid .................................618
Maintenance ............................565
Shifting ...............................305
Transporting Pets ..........................285
Tread Wear Indicators .......................582
Turn Signals .....................77, 201, 466, 468
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features .............634
Uconnect Settings ..............625, 632, 634, 655
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .......36, 632, 655
12
INDEX 709
Passive Entry Programming ...........36, 632, 655
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................594
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)........112
Universal Transmitter........................112
Unleaded Gasoline .........................608
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................234
USB....................................666
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area..................150
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............605
Vehicle Loading ........................425, 576
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................6
Vehicle Storage .........................102, 595
Viscosity, Engine Oil .....................540, 541
Voice Command ...........................668
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................668
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions). . . .196
Warnings And Cautions .......................5
Warranty Information .......................693
Washers, Windshield......................83, 537
Washing Vehicle ...........................596
Water
Driving Through .........................453
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................589
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...................589
Wheel Cover ..............................512
Winch ..................................386
Accessories .............................389
Operation ..............................390
Rigging Techniques .......................401
Usage .................................386
Wind Buffeting .........................107, 109
Window Fogging...........................102
Windows ................................104
Power ................................104
Reset Auto-Up ..........................106
Windshield Defroster ........................287
Windshield Washers ...................82,
83, 537
Fluid ...............................82, 537
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................553
Windshield Wipers ..........................82
Wipers Blade Replacement ....................553
Wipers, Intermittent .........................83
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ........................84
710 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Fifth Edition Rev 2
Printed in the U.S.A.
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
18DS-126-AE
OWNER’S MANUAL
2018
1500/2500/3500
RAM TRUCK
RAM TRUCK 1500/2500/3500
2018
